Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 290

Preface, Contents

Product Overview
1
Information on the Controller
Settings
2
SIMATIC How Does the FM 355 Controller
Module Work?
3
Installing and Removing the
Controller Module FM 355 FM 355
4

Wiring the FM 355


5
Assigning Parameters to the
Manual FM 355
6
Integrating the FM 355 into the
User Program
7

Starting Up the FM 355


8
This manual is part of the configuration package Properties of Digital and Analog
with the order number: Inputs and Outputs
9
6ES7 355-0VH00-8BA0 Connecting Measuring Sensors
and Loads/Actuators
10

Assignment of the Data Blocks


11

Faults and Diagnostics


12

Examples
13

Appendices

Data Sheet
A

Spare Parts
B

Literature List
C

Glossary, Index
02/2000
A5E00059344
Edition 02
Safety guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:

Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Correct Usage
Note the following:

Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright Siemens AG 1998 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability


The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hard-
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for ware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely,
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are
a utility model or design, are reserved. reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent
editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.

Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechniktechnik
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierungssysteme  Siemens AG 1998
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Controller Module FM 355
SiemensIndex-2
Aktiengesellschaft A5E00059344 A5E00059344
Preface

Purpose of the Manual


This manual describes all the steps required to operate the FM 355 function
module. It introduces you quickly and effectively to the functions of the FM 355.

Contents of the Manual


This manual describes the hardware and software for the FM 355. It consists of an
introductory section and a reference section (appendices).
The manual contains sections on the following topics:
• Basic information on closed-loop control
• Installing and removing the FM 355
• Wiring the FM 355
• Assigning parameters to the FM 355
• Programming the FM 355
• Appendix

Users
This manual is aimed at the following readers:
• Installation engineers
• Programmers
• Operators
• Service and maintenance personnel

Validity of the Manual


This manual contains the description of the FM 355 function module valid at the
time the manual was printed. We reserve the right to describe any subsequent
changes to the functions of the FM 355 in a Product Information.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 iii
Preface

Which Approvals Does the System Have?


The following approvals have been obtained for the S7-300 system:
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to
Standard UL 508
CSA Certification Mark
Canadian Standard association (CSA) to
Standard C 22.2 No. 142
Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Standard Class Number 3611,
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D.

Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if plug-in
connections are interrupted during operation of an S7-300.
The S7-300 must always be deenergized prior to separating plug-in connections in
hazardous areas.

Warning
! WARNING - DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE
UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

CE Certification
Our products meet the requirements of EU Directive 89/336/EEC “Electromagnetic
Compatibility”.
In accordance with the above-mentioned EU Directive, Article 10, the EU
declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at
the address below:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation Group
A&D AS E48
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Fed. Rep. of Germany

Controller Module FM 355


iv A5E00059344-02
Preface

Where Does this Manual Fit in with the Rest of the Documentation?
This manual is part of the documentation on S7-300, M7-300 and ET 200M.

System Documentation
S7-300 • S7-300 Programmable Controller;
Hardware and Installation Manual
• S7-300/M7-300 Programmable Controllers;
Module Specifications
• S7-300 Instruction List
M7-300 • M7-300 Programmable Controller;
Hardware and Installation Manual
• S7-300/M7-300 Programmable Controllers;
Module Specifications
ET 200M • ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
• S7-300/M7-300 Programmable Controllers;
Module Specifications

How to Find Your Way Around the Manual


The manual contains the following conventions to make it easier for you to find
specific information quickly:
• A complete table of contents is to be found at the front of the manual.
• At the end of the Appendix is a Glossary in which important technical terms
used in the manual are defined.
• At the end of the manual you will find a literature list and an index which also
speeds up access to the information you seek.

Further Support
If you have any questions about using the products described in this manual and
cannot find an answer here, please contact the Siemens representative in your
area. You will find a list of addresses in the Appendix “SIEMENS Companies and
Representatives” in the S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and
Installation Manual.
If you have any questions or comments on this manual, please fill out the remarks
form at the end of the manual and return it to the address shown on the form. We
would be grateful if you could also take the time to answer the questions giving
your personal opinion of the manual.
Siemens also offers a number of training courses to introduce you to the
SIMATIC S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or
the central training center in Nuremberg, Germany for details: D-90327
Nuremberg, Tel. 0911 895 3200

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 v
Preface

Constant Up-to-Date Information


The SIMATIC Customer Support team offers you substantial additional information
about SIMATIC products via its online services:
• General current information can be obtained from:
– the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic
• Current product information leaflets and downloads which you may find useful
are available:
– the Internet under unter http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs
– via the Bulletin Board System (BBS) in Nuremberg (SIMATIC Customer
Support Mailbox) under the number +49 (911) 895-7100.
To access the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8 Kbps) with
parameters set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI; or dial in via ISDN (x.75, 64 Kbps).

Nuremberg
Johnson City

Singapore

SIMATIC Hotline

Nuremberg Johnson City Singapore


SIMATIC BASIC Hotline SIMATIC BASIC Hotline SIMATIC BASIC Hotline
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 7:00 to 17:00 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:30 to 17:30
Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Phone: +1 423 461-2522 Phone: +65 740-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 Fax: +1 423 461-2231 Fax: +65 740-7001
E-Mail: techsupport@ E-Mail: simatic.hotline@ E-Mail: simatic.hotline@
ad.siemens.de sea.siemens.com sae.siemens.com.sg
GMT: +1:00 GMT: –5:00 GMT: +8:00

Nuremberg SIMATIC
SIMATIC Authorization Hotline Premium Hotline
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 7:00 to 17:00 (fee based, only with
Phone: +49 (911) 895-7200 SIMATIC Card)
Fax: +49 (911) 895-7201 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 0:00 to 24:00
E-Mail: authorization@ Phone: +49 (911) 895-7777
nbgm.siemens.de Fax: +49 (911) 895-7001
GMT: +1:00 GMT: +01:00
The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines are generally German and English, in addition, French, Italian and Spanish are
spoken on the authorization hotline.

Controller Module FM 355


vi A5E00059344-02
Contents

1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


1.1 Functionality of the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Where to Use the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3 FM 355 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.4 FM 355 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2 Information on the Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Characteristic Values of the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Controler Type (Two-Step, Three-Step Controllers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Control Response for Various Feedback Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4 Selection of the Controller Structures for a Specific Process . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.5 Setting of the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization) . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.6 Determining the Process Parameters for Two/Three-Step Controllers . . . 2-18
2.7 Determining the Process Parameters for Pure Cooling Controllers . . . . . 2-21
2.8 Determining the Parameters by Trying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
3 How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Basic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Inputs of the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.1 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2 Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5 Outputs of the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.6 Control Action Mechanisms and Data Management in the FM 355 . . . . . 3-37
3.7 Properties of the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.8 Parameter Optimization at the Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
4 Installing and Removing the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 How to Install and Remove the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 vii
Contents

5 Wiring the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


5.1 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Wiring Front Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3 Module State after First Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
6 Assigning Parameters to the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
7 Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 The Function Block PID_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Operating by Means of the FB PID_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Monitoring by Means of the FB PID_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.3 Changing Controller Parameters via the FB PID_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.4 Changing the Controller Parameters via The OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.5 Saving the Parameters in the EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.1.6 Relationship between FB Parameters and
Parameter Assignment Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2 The Function Block FUZ_355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.3 The Function Block FORCE355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.4 The Function Block READ_355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.5 The Function Block CH_DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.6 The Function Block PID_PAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.7 The Function Block CJ_T_PAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
8 Starting Up the FM 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9 Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (S Controllers) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Properties of the Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3 Properties of the Analog Outputs (C Controllers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
10 Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Use of Thermoelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3 Connecting Voltage and Current Sensors and
Resistance Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
11 Assignment of the Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Instance DB of the FB PID_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Instance DB of the FB FUZ_355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11.3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.4 Instance DB of the FB READ_355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
11.5 Instance DB of the FB CH_DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30

Controller Module FM 355


viii A5E00059344-02
Contents

11.6 Instance DB of the FB PID_PAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32


11.7 Instance DB of the FB CJ_T_PAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
11.8 Allocation of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via OP . . . . . . 11-36
12 Faults and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Fault Indication via the Group Error LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 Triggering of Diagnostics Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 Faults in Measuring Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
13 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Application Example for the FM 355 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Application Example for the FM 355 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.3 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.4 Interconnection Example for a Cascade Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.5 Interconnection Example for a Ratio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.6 Interconnection Example for a Blending Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
A Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Technical Specifications - Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.2 Technical Specifications - Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.3 Technical Specifications - Parameter Assignment Software . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
B Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C Literature List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 ix
Contents

Controller Module FM 355


x A5E00059344-02
Product Overview 1
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter provides an overview of the FM 355 function module.
• You are familiarized with the functionality and some applications of the FM 355.
• You learn how the FM 355 is used in the S7-300 programmable controller and
get to know the most important components of the FM 355.

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


1.1 Functionality of the FM 355 1-2
1.2 Where to Use the FM 355 1-4
1.3 FM 355 Hardware 1-5
1.4 FM 355 Software 1-8

Variants of the FM 355


The FM 355 has the following two variants:
• C controller (continuous-action controller with analog outputs)
• S controller (step-action and pulse controller with digital outputs)

Order Numbers

Module Name Function Order No.


FM 355 C • C controller, edition ≥6 6ES7355-0VH10-0AE0
(continuous controller)
• CD with configuration package,
manual and Getting Started
FM 355 S • S controller, edition ≥6 6ES7355-1VH10-0AE0
(step and pulse controller)
• CD with configuration package,
manual and Getting Started

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 1-1
Product Overview

1.1 Functionality of the FM 355

Overview
The FM 355 function module is a closed-loop control module for use in the
S7-300 programmable controller.

Control Processes
The FM 355 can perform two different types of control. Both types have methods
for optimizing the control process:

Control Process Optimized by...


Temperature controller (fuzzy ... the module (self-tuning controller)
controller)
PID controller ... configuration interface or PID Self Tuner

Control Structures
You can use the FM 355 for the following control structures:
• Fixed setpoint control
• Follow-up control
• Three-component control
• Cascade control
• Ratio control
• Blending control
• Split-range control

Operating Modes
The FM 355 recognizes the following operating modes:
• Automatic
• Manual
• Safety operation
• Follow-up mode (switching to preset safety value)
• Defined manipulated value DDC (Direct Digital Control)
• Follow-up/SPC controller (SPC = Setpoint Control)
• Back-up mode (when CPU in STOP or if CPU fails)

Controller Module FM 355


1-2 A5E00059344-02
Product Overview

Number of Channels
There are four independent controllers in four channels on the FM 355.

Number of Inputs and Outputs


Table 1-1 shows an overview of the number of inputs and outputs on the FM 355.

Table 1-1 Inputs and Outputs of the FM 355

Inputs/Outputs FM 355 C FM 355 S


Analog inputs 4 4
Digital inputs 8 8
Analog outputs 4 –
Digital outputs – 8

Diagnostic Interrupt
The FM 355 can trigger a diagnostic interrupt if any of the following events occur:
• Module parameter assignment faulty
• Module defective
• Overflow and underflow in analog inputs
• Break in load or short circuit in analog outputs

Hardware Interrupts
No hardware interrupts are required to operate the FM 355.

Reference Junction
For use with thermocouples the FM 355 has an additional analog input for the
connection of a Pt 100 using 4-wire control. This input is used with thermocouples
and serves to measure the temperature of the reference junction and to
compensate it.

Parameter Assignment
Parameters can be assigned to the FM 355 using parameter assignment software.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 1-3
Product Overview

1.2 Where to Use the FM 355

Where Can You Use the FM 355?


The FM 355 is a closed-loop control module which can be used universally for the
following control tasks:
• Temperature control
• Level control
• Fill control
• Pressure control
• Flow control
• Concentration control

Areas of Use
The FM 355 can be used for control tasks in all of the following branches of
industry:
• General mechanical engineering
• System engineering
• Industrial furnaces
• Cooling and heating systems (HVAC)
• Food and beverages
• Process engineering
• Environmental engineering
• Glass and ceramic manufacturing
• Rubber and plastics machinery
• Wood and paper

Controller Module FM 355


1-4 A5E00059344-02
Product Overview

1.3 FM 355 Hardware

View of Module
Figure 1-1 shows the FM 355 module with its front connectors and the bus
connector with the front panels closed.

Type plate
Front connectors
with front
connector coding
Diagnostics and
status LEDs

Bus connector
SIMATIC interface
Labeling strips

7
8 9
Order number
Release

Figure 1-1 View of the FM 355 Module

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 1-5
Product Overview

Front Connector
The FM 355 offers the following connections via the front connectors:
• 8 digital inputs
• 4 analog inputs
• 1 reference junction input
• 8 digital outputs (S controllers only)
• 4 analog outputs (C controllers only)
• Power supply DC 24 V between L+ and M to supply the module and the digital
and analog outputs
• Reference point of the analog loop MANA
The front connectors must be ordered separately (see Appendix B).

Front Connector Coding


When you press a front connector from the wiring position to the operating
position, the front connector coding engages. Once this is done, this front
connector can then only be used on an FM 355.

Labeling Strips
Enclosed with the module are two labeling strips which you can use to label each
signal name.
The insides of the front panels are labeled with the corresponding terminal
assignments.

Order Number and Release


The order number and release of the FM 355 are printed at the bottom edge of the
left-hand front panel. ”label on FM 355”# ”label on FM 355”#

Bus Connector
Communication within one tier of the S7-300 is realized by means of a bus
connector. The bus connector is supplied with the FM 355.

Diagnostic and Status LEDs


The FM 355 has ten LEDs that can be used both for diagnostic purposes and also
to indicate the status of the FM 355 and its digital inputs.
Table 1-2 lists the LEDs with their labeling, color and function.

Controller Module FM 355


1-6 A5E00059344-02
Product Overview

Table 1-2 Labeling, Color and Function of the LEDs

Label Color Function


SF Red Group error
Backup Yellow Indicates back-up operation
I1 Green Status of the digital input I1
I2 Green Status of the digital input I2
I3 Green Status of the digital input I3
I4 Green Status of the digital input I4
I5 Green Status of the digital input I5
I6 Green Status of the digital input I6
I7 Green Status of the digital input I7
I8 Green Status of the digital input I8

The light-emitting diodes next to the binary outputs of the FM 355 S are not
controlled and are not without meaning.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 1-7
Product Overview

1.4 FM 355 Software

Software Package of the FM 355


To integrate the FM 355 into the S7-300 you will require a software package with:
• Parameter assignment software
• Software for the CPU (function blocks)

Parameter Assignment Interface


Parameters are used to adapt the FM 355 to each task. These parameters are
stored in the system data and downloaded to the CPU from the programming
device or PC when the CPU is in STOP and then transferred to the FM 355. The
CPU also transfers these parameters to the module during every transition from
STOP to RUN.
You can enter the parameters via the parameter assignment software. The
parameter assignment application is installed on your programming device or PC
and called within STEP 7.

Online Help
You will find more information on assigning parameters in the integrated on-line
help.

Controller Module FM 355


1-8 A5E00059344-02
Product Overview

Software for the S7-300 CPU (Function Blocks)


The software for the CPU consists of the following function blocks:
• PID_FM for changing parameters and operating modes (for example, setpoint
value, manual-automatic changeover) during running operation and for reading
process states (for example, process value).
• FORCE355 for forcing analog and digital inputs during the setup (force function
= specify simulation values).
• READ_355 for reading out the analog and digital input values during setting up.
• CH_DIAG for reading out channel-specific diagnostic values during setting up.
• FUZ_355 for reading out the parameters of the self-tuning temperature
controller (fuzzy controller) and for loading these parameters to the FM 355 (for
example, when replacing modules without repeated parameter identification of
the controller).
• PID_PAR for special applications to change further parameters during running
operation.
Figure 1-2 shows an S7-300 programmable controller configuration containing an
FM 355 and a number of signal modules.

Programming device (PG)


with STEP 7 and the
parameter assignment
screen forms

CPU
with user program
and FBs for the
FM 355
FM 355

Figure 1-2 SIMATIC S7-300 Containing an FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 1-9
Product Overview

Controller Module FM 355


1-10 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings 2
What Does this Chapter Describe?
The following chapter provides some information on settings for the PID controller
with a pulse-pause output used as a standard in accordance with previous
experience (in the field of plastics).

Section Description Page


2.1 Characteristic Values of the Process 2-2
2.2 Controler Type (Two-Step, Three-Step Controllers) 2-4
2.3 Control Response for Various Feedback Structures 2-7
2.4 Selection of the Controller Structures for a Specific Process 2-15
2.5 Setting of the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization) 2-16
2.6 Determining the Process Parameters for Two/Three-Step 2-18
Controllers
2.7 Determining the Process Parameters for Pure Cooling 2-21
Controllers
2.8 Determining the Parameters by Trying 2-23

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-1
Information on the Controller Settings

2.1 Characteristic Values of the Process

The time response of the process can be determined by the time characteristics of
the controlled variable x after an abrupt change in the manipulated variable y from
0 to 100%.

100 % ON
Yh
y = Manipulated variable
Yh = Manipulated range
Tu = Dead time
Tg = Delay time
Ks = Transfer coefficient
of the process

Xmax
0 % OFF Ks =
Yh

t
x

Tg
Xmax

Xh

x Ks

t

Tu t

Vmax = Max. rate of rise Xmax x


of the process variable
Xmax = Maximum value of the process Vmax = =
Tg t
Xh = Setting range of the controller

Figure 2-1 Step Response of a Process

Controller Module FM 355


2-2 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

Most of the processes are so-called processes with compensation (refer to


Figure 2-1). The time response can be approximated by means of the variables
Dead time Tu, Delay time Tg and Maximum value Xmax. The variables are
determined by applying tangents to the maximum value and to the point of
inflection of the step response. In many cases it is not possible to use the transient
function up to the maximum value since the process variable may not exceed
certain values. The rate of rise vmax is therefore used to recognize the process.

Tu Tu × vmax
The ratio or
Tg Xmax
can be used to estimate the controllability of the process. The following applies:

Tu
Controllability of the Process
Tg
<0.1 Can be controlled well
0.1 to 0.3 Can still be controlled
>0.3 Is difficult to control

Processes can be judged in accordance with these values:


Tu < 0.5 min, Tg < 5 min = Fast process
Tu > 0.5 min, Tg > 5 min = Slow process

Characteristic Values of Important Temperature Processes

Process Type of Process Dead Time Delay Time Rate of Rise


Variable vmax
Tu Tg
Temperature Small, electrically heated furnace 0.5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min Up to 60 K/min
Large, electrically heated annealing 1 to 5 min 10 to 20 min Up to 20 K/min
furnace
Large, gas-heated annealing 0.2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min 1 to 30 K/min
furnace
Autoclaves 0.5 to 0.7 min 10 to 20 min
High-pressure autoclaves 12 to 15 min 200 to 300 min
Injection moulding machines 0.5 to 3 min 3 to 30 min 5 to 20 K/min
Extruder 1 to 6 min 5 to 60 min
Packaging machines 0.5 to 4 min 3 to 40min 2 to 35 K/min

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-3
Information on the Controller Settings

2.2 Controler Type (Two-Step, Three-Step Controllers)

Two-Step Controllers Without Feedback


Two-step controllers have the states ”ON” and ”OFF” as switching functions. This
corresponds to 100 % or 0 % performance. This behavior causes a sustained
oscillation of the process variable x around the setpoint value w.
The amplitude and the duration of the oscillation increase with the ratio of the dead
time Tu to the delay time Tg of the process. These controllers are used mainly for
simple temperature control systems (for example, for directly electrically heated
furnaces) or as limit alarm monitors.

y Yh = Manipulated range
w = Reference variable

ON Yh

OFF

w x

Figure 2-2 Characteristics of a Two-Step Controller

Controller Module FM 355


2-4 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

x Tg

Tu = Dead time
Transient function
Tg = Delay time
without controller
XSd = Differential gap

XSd

Tu t

y
100 %

0%
t

Figure 2-3 Control Function of a Two-Step Controller without Feedback

Two-Step Controllers With Feedback


The performance of two-step controllers at processes with high dead times, for
example, furnaces in which the useful space of the furnace is separated from the
heating, can be improved by using electronic feedbacks.
The feedback is used to increase the switch rate of the controller, causing the
amplitude of the process variable to be reduced. In addition, the control results can
be improved notably in dynamic operation. The limit for the switch rate is set by the
output module. It should not exceed 1 to 5 switches per minute for mechanical final
controlling elements such as relays and contactors. High switch rates which lie far
above the critical frequency of the process can be selected in the case of binary
voltage and current outputs with downstream thyristor or Triac actuating elements.
Since the switching impulse at the output of the process can no longer be
determined, results which are comparable to continuous controllers are obtained.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-5
Information on the Controller Settings

In contrast to continuous controllers in which the amplitude of the output signal


represents the manipulated variable, the output variable of a two-step controller
with feedback is formed by the pulse width modulation.
Two-step controllers with feedback are used to control the temperature in furnaces,
processing machines in the plastics, textile, paper, rubber and foodstuffs industries
as well as for heating and cooling devices.

Three-Step Controllers
Three-step controllers are used for heating/cooling. These controllers have
2 switching points as outputs. The controller results are optimized by means of
electronic feedback structures. Such controllers are used in heating, refrigerating
and climatic chambers and for heating tools for plastic processing machines.

y
y11

y 12 = y21

y22

w x

xSh

y = Manipulated variable w = Setpoint


e.g. y11 = 100 % heating xSh = Distance between Switching
Point 1 and Switching Point 2
y12 = 0 % heating
y21 = 0 % cooling
y22 = 100 % cooling

x = Process variable
for example temperature in °C

Figure 2-4 Characteristics of a Three-Step Controller

Controller Module FM 355


2-6 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

2.3 Control Response for Various Feedback Structures

The controller has to be adapated to the transient response of the process in order
to achieve precision in a control system and optimal disturbance correction.
Feedback structures are used for this purpose. Depending on the structure the
feedback circuit has a proportional action (P), proportional-plus-derivative action
(PD), proportional-plus-integral action (PI) or
proportional-plus-integral-plus-derivate action (PID). If a jump function is applied to
the controller input, step responses arise provided that the dead times of the
controller are negligibly small and that the controller can react very fast (refer to
Figures 2-5 to 2-9).

P Controller

x
Jump function to
the controller input

Input variable
t

y
Step response of the
continuous controller

Output variable t

100 %
Step response of the
pulse controller

0%
Output variable t

Figure 2-5 The Step Response of a P Controller

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-7
Information on the Controller Settings

Equation for P Controller


Output variable and input variable are directly proportional. This means:
Output variable change = Proportional gain × Input variable change

y = GAIN × xw

Controller Module FM 355


2-8 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

PD Controller

Jump function to the


controller input

Input variable t

TM_LAG Step response of the


continuous controller

Output variable t
y

100 %

Step response of the


pulse controller

0%
Output variable t

Figure 2-6 Step Response of a PD Controller

D controller elements alone are not suitable for controlling, since they no longer
emit a control command when the input variable has readjusted to the static value.
In combination with P controller elements the derivative component is used to
generate a corresponding actuating pulse in dependency of the speed of change of
the process variable. If a disturbance variable z acts on the process, the
PD controller adjusts to a different system deviation on the basis of the changed
actuating degree. Disturbances are not compensated completely. The good
dynamic response is advantageous. A well damped non-oscillating transition is
achieved during the startup and when the setpoint changes. A controller with
derivative component is, however not appropriate when a process has oscillating
measured variables, for example, in case of pressure or flow control systems.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-9
Information on the Controller Settings

Equation for PD Controller

The following applies for the step response of the PD controller in the time
range:

-t
TD TM_LAG
y = GAIN × xw × 1 + × e
TM_LAG

t = Duration since the jump in the input variable

Controller Module FM 355


2-10 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

PI Controller

Jump function to the


controller input

Input variable t

Step response of the


continuous controller

Output variable t

100 %

Step response of the


pulse controller

0%
Output variable t

Figure 2-7 Step Response of a PI Controller

I controller elements have the integral of the input variable as the output variable.
This means that the controller sums the derivation from the setpoint value across
the time. This means that the controller corrections are corrected until the
derivation is cleared by the setpoint variable. In reality a combination of the various
timers is ideal, depending on the requirements placed on the control response. The
time response of the individual elements can be described by the control

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-11
Information on the Controller Settings

parameters proportional band GAIN, integral-action time TI (integral component)


and derivative-action time TD (derivative component).

Equation for PI Controller

The following applies for the step response of the PI controller in the time
range:

1
y = GAIN × xw × 1 +
TI × t

t = Duration since the jump in the input variable

Controller Module FM 355


2-12 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

PID Controller

Jump function to the


controller input

Input variable t

TM_LAG
Step response of the
continuous controller

Output variable t

Tn

Step response of the


pulse controller

Output variable
t
Figure 2-8 Step Response of a PID Controller

Most of the control systems occurring in process engineering can be controlled


with a controller with PI action. In the case of processes with a large dead time, for
example, temperature control systems, the control result can be improved by
means of a controller with PID action.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-13
Information on the Controller Settings

x
100 %

Transient function
without controller
PID

PD

0%
t

Figure 2-9 Step Response for Various Control Responses

Controllers with PI and PID action have the advantage that the process variable
does not show a derivation from the setpoint value after the transient condition.
The process variable oscillates across the setpoint variable during starting up.

Equation for PID Controller

The following applies for the step response of the PI controller in the time
range:

-t
1 TD TM_LAG
y = GAIN × xw × 1 + + × e
TI × t TM_LAG

t = Duration since the jump in the input variable

Controller Module FM 355


2-14 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

2.4 Selection of the Controller Structures for a Specific Process


The processes have a special position within the control loop elements. Their
properties are determined by the process-engineering applications and cannot be
modified afterwards. An optimal control result can therefore only be achieved by
selecting a suitable controller whose action can be adapted to the process data
within certain limits.

Selection of the Suitable Controller Structures

Controller Structure
Process
P PD PI PID

Control
Pure dead Unusable Unusable Unusable
+ disturbance
time

Somewhat Control
Dead time + delay Unusable Unusable worse than + disturbance
of the 1st order
PID

Dead time Worse Control


+ delay of the Unsuitable Worse than PID + disturbance
2nd order

First order + very Disturbance


Control Control at Disturbance
small dead time at dead time
dead time

Somewhat
Higher order Unsuitable Unsuitable worse than Control
PID + disturbance

Without Control Control Disturbance Disturbance


compensation (without delay) (with delay) (without delay) (with delay)

Suitable Controller for the Most Important Process Variables


Controller P PD PI PID
Process
Variable Steady-state deviation No steady-state deviation
For minor
requirements and The most suitable controller types for
Temperature for P processes Well suited sophisticated requirements
with T (except for specifically adapted
u special controllers)
< 0.1
Tg
Suitable, if no The most suitable controller types for
Pressure notable dead time Unsuitable sophisticated requirements
(except for specifically adapted
special controllers)
Less suitable,
because required Usable Hardly required
Flow Unsuitable but I controller for these process
GAIN range
usually too large alone often better variables

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-15
Information on the Controller Settings

2.5 Setting of the Controller Characteristic Values (Optimization)

Thumbrules for the Parameter Settings

Controller Structure Setting


P GAIN≈ vmax × Tu [ °C ]
PI GAIN ≈ 1.2 × vmax × Tu [ °C ]
PD GAIN ≈ 0.83 × vmax × Tu [ °C ]
TD ≈ 0.25 × vmax × Tu [ min ]
TM_LAG ≈ 0.5 × TD [ min ]
PID GAIN ≈ 0.83 × vmax × Tu [ °C ]
TI ≈ 2 × Tu [ min ]
TD ≈ 0.4 × Tu [ min ]
TM_LAG ≈ 0.5 × TD [ min ]
PD/PID GAIN ≈ 0.4 × vmax × Tu [ °C ]
TI ≈ 2 × Tu [ min ]
TD ≈ 0.4 × Tu [ min ]
TM_LAG ≈ 0.5 × TD [ min ]

Instead of Vmax = ∆x/∆t Xmax/Tg can be used.


In the case of controllers with a PID structure the settings for the integral-action
time and the derivative action time are usually coupled to each other.
The ratio TI/TD lies between 4 and 5 and is optimal for most of the processes.
Non-observance of the derivative action time TD is not critical for PD controllers.
In the case of PI or PID controllers control oscillations occur if the integral-action
time TI was selected too low by more than half.
An integral-action time which is too high retards the correction of disturbances. It is
unrealistic to expect the control loops to operate ”optimally” after the initial
parameter settings. Experience shows that adjustment is always necessary when
there is a process which is ”difficult to control” with Tu/Tg > 0.3.

Controller Module FM 355


2-16 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

Feedbacks and Processes

Process ∆x
Type of Process Tu or Tt 1) Tg or Ts 2) Vmax. =
Variable ∆t

Temperature Small, electrically heated 0.5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min 1 °C/s


furnace

Large, electrically heated 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 0.3 °C/s


annealing furnace

Large, gas-heated 0.2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min


annealing furnace

Distillation tower 1 to 7 min 40 to 60 min 0.1 to 0.5 °C/s

Autoclave (2.5 m3) 0.5 to 0.7 min 10 to 20 min

High-pressure autoclave 12 to 15 min 200 to 230 min


(1000 °C, 40 bars)

Steam superheater 30 s to 2.5 min 1 to 4 min 2 °C/s

Room heating 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 1 °C/min

Flow Pipeline with gas 0 to 5 s 0.2 to 10 s -


Pipeline with liquid 0 0

Pressure Gas pipeline 0 0.1 s -

Drum type furnace with gas 0 150 s -


or oil combustion

Drum type furnace with 1 to 2 min 2 to 5 min -


rigid-hammer crusher

Level Drum type furnace 0.6 to 1 min - 0.1 to 0.3 cm/s

Operating Small electrical drive 0 0.2 to 10s -


speed
Large electrical drive 0 5 to 40 s -

Steam turbine 0 - 50 min-1

Voltage Small generators 0 1 to 5 s -


Large generators 0 5 to 10 s -

1) Tt = Dead time 2) TS = Process constant

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-17
Information on the Controller Settings

2.6 Determining the Process Parameters for Two/Three-Step


Controllers

A recorder can be used to record the heating and cooling behavior of the
temperature processes (refer to Figure 2-10). To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the PG manipulated value 0 via the loop display.
2. Configure the controller as a PI controller.
3. Use the parameter assignment interface or the PID_FM FB to enter non-critical
control parameters:
GAIN = 1.0
TI, TD = 0.0
4. Download the parameters to the module.
5. Switch to the manipulated-value controller via the loop display.
6. Enter the setpoint temperature (1).
→ The module switches on the heating.
7. Wait till the process variable has ”settled” (2).
Note: The setpoint value does not have to be reached.
8. Enter 0 °C as the setpoint temperature.(3).
→ The module switches on the cooling.
Note: Steps 7. and 8.are only required for three-step controllers.
The following parameters can then be determined from the curve:
TU = Dead time (in s)
SK = Maximum rise in the cooling curve (in °C/s)
SH = Maximum rise in the heating curve (in °C/s)

2
SK
Temperature Setpoint
temperature
3

TU
SH

1
Initial
temperature
TU
0 Heating curve Cooling curve Time

Figure 2-10 Determined Heating and Cooling Curve

Controller Module FM 355


2-18 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

Determining the Controller Parameters

(a) TA [ms] = Sampling time


TA is determined by the conversion time of FM 355 (refer to
Section 3.7).
TA can be read out in the Tools > Module Parameters
menu of the parameter assignment interface.

230 [°C]
(b) GAIN =
TA [ms ]
SH °C × TU [ s ] +
s ms
2000
s

TA [ms ] s
(c) TI [s] = TU [ s ] + × 6.66
ms s
1000
s

TA [ms ]
(d) TD [s] = TU [ s ] + × 0.6
ms
1000
s

Additionally for three-step controllers:


°C
SK
s
(e) LMN_LLM = × ( -100 [%] )
°C
SH
s

LMN_LLM is a parameter of the PID_FM FB. It specifies the lower limit of the
controller.
You can enter this value at the ”Lower” parameter of the Limit Manipulated
Value Controller mask.
You have to set the same value at the “Start of Range Input Signal” of
manipulated value B in the Split-range Controller mask.
The two settings must agree so that the input value of the split-range function
of the controller can use values from the complete setting range of the
split-range function.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-19
Information on the Controller Settings

Example:
Manipulated variable 0% to 100%
corresponds to heating
Manipulated variable-100% to 0%
corresponds to cooling

Set the parameters of the split-range function as follows for this example:
• Manipulated value A:
– Start of range Input signal = 0
– End of range Input signal = 100
– Start of range Output signal = 0
– End of range Output signal = 100
• Manipulated value B:
– End of range Input signal = 0
– Start of range Output signal = 100
– End of range Output signal = 0

Controller Module FM 355


2-20 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

2.7 Determining the Process Parameters for Pure Cooling


Controllers
A recorder is used to record the cooling behavior of the temperature process (refer
to Figure 2-11).
To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Enter non-critical control parameters:
GAIN = 1.0
TI, TD = 0.0
2. Set the manipulated value to manual mode.
3. Enter the manipulated value 0 via the loop display.
4. Let the temperature ”settle” to the operating temperature through external heat
application (for example, from adjacent heating zones).
5. Enter the setpoint temperature 0 °C via the loop display (1).
6. Set the manipulated value to closed-loop control.
→ The module switches on the cooling.

Note
During the cooling process the external heating energy supply must remain
constant - adjacent heating zones must therefore be heated with a constant
manipulated variable!

1
1 SK
Temperature

Tini

TU TU

SK
Cooling curve

Time

Figure 2-11 Determined Cooling Curve

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-21
Information on the Controller Settings

• The following parameters can then be determined from the curve:


TU = Dead time (in s)
SK = Maximum rise in the cooling curve (in °C/s)
Tini = Initial temperature (in °C)
• In addition the temperature Tcool(in °C) of the cooling mediums has to be
determined.

Determining the Controller Parameters

(a) TA [ms] = Sampling time


TA is determined by the conversion time of FM 355 (refer to
Section 3.7).
TA can be read out in the Tools > Module Parameters
menu of the parameter assignment interface.

230 [ °C ]
(b) GAIN of 200 °C =
200 °C - TCOOL[°C] TA [ms ]
°C
SK × × TU [ s ] +
s ms
Tini[°C] - TCOOL[°C] 2000
s

TA [ms ]
s
(a) TN [s] = TU [ s ] + × 6.66
ms s
1000
s

TA [ms ]
(a) TD [s] = TU [ s ] + × 0.6
ms
1000
s

Controller Module FM 355


2-22 A5E00059344-02
Information on the Controller Settings

2.8 Determining the Parameters by Trying

Alternatively to calculating the parameters you can determine them by trying


specific values (refer to Figure 2-12 for information on the procedure).

Starting point: GAIN low; TD 0 or low TD = 0 means:


TI high Path is deactivated

Excitation: By abrupt
setpoint difference

GAIN

Damping bad? Yes


(controller oscillates)
No
TD

Y
e Damping too good?
s
No

No Does an increase in TD
result in marked
impovement of the
damping?
Yes
Reduce GAIN and TD until the transient
function has 5% overshooting

TI TD

Overshooting > 5 %?
Yes

No

Yes Aim
Overshooting ≈ 5 %? reached

No

Figure 2-12 Setting the Controller by Trying Specific Values

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 2-23
Information on the Controller Settings

Optimal controller setting

TD=0.5 TD opt
TD=2 TD opt

TI= 2 TI opt
TI= 0.5 TI opt

TGAIN=0.5 GAIN opt TGAIN=2 GAIN opt

Figure 2-13 Effect on the Optimal Controller Setting of Changes in the Controller Parameters

Controller Module FM 355


2-24 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module
Work? 3
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter provides an overview of the basic structure of the FM 355, its mode of
operation in principle and its properties.

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355 3-2
3.2 Basic Parameters 3-5
3.3 Inputs of the FM 355 3-6
3.4 Controlller 3-10
3.5 Outputs of the FM 355 3-35
3.6 Mode of Operation and Data Management in the FM 355 3-37
3.7 Properties of the FM 355 3-43
3.8 Parameter Optimization at the Temperature Controller 3-49

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-1
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.1 Basic Structure of the FM 355

Overview
In this section block diagrams are used to explain the basic structure and the
interconnection possibilities of the FM 355.

Basic Structure of the FM 355


FM 355 C and FM 355 S have a similar basic structure. It consists of the following
function blocks:
• Inputs of the FM 355
– 4 analog inputs with analog value conditioning
– 1 reference junction input for compensating thermoelements
– 8 digital inputs
• Controller
– 4 controller channels independent of each other, each subdivided into the
units system error formation, control algorithm and controller output
• Outputs of the FM 355
– 4 analog outputs (only FM 355 C)
– 8 digital outputs (only FM 355 S)

Controller Module FM 355


3-2 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Block Diagram of the FM 355 C


Figure 3-1 shows the block diagram of the FM 355 C (continuous controller) and
the interconnection possibilities between the individual function blocks.

Inputs of the FM 355 C Controlller Outputs of the


FM 355 C

Analog input 1 Analog value


conditioning
Analog output 1

Controller
channel 1
Analog input 4 Analog value
conditioning

Reference
junction for
analog input 1
to 4 Analog output 4
Controller
channel 4

Digital input 1

Digital input 8 Assignment of the inputs and


outputs to the controller channels
can be configured freely

Figure 3-1 Block Diagram of the FM 355 C (Continuous Controller)

Interconnection Possibilities of the FM 355 C


The function blocks of the FM 355 C do not have a fixed assignment to each other.
On the contrary, it is possible to interconnect them by means of configuration.
Each analog input has its own analog value conditioning (filtering, linearization,
normalization).
You can assign up to 4 analog inputs and up to 3 digital inputs to each controller
channel. Each controller channel can be interconnected to the conditioned analog
values, the digital inputs or also the output of another controller channel.
Every analog output can be interconnected to a controller output or to an analog
value conditioning. The possibility of interconnecting to an analog value
conditioning can be used, for example, to convert a non-linear temperature value
into a linear output signal.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-3
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Block Diagram of the FM 355 S


Figure 3-2 shows the block diagram of the FM 355 S (step controller) and the
interconnection possibilities between the individual function blocks.

Inputs of the FM 355 S Controlller Outputs of the FM 355 S

Analog input 1 Analog


value
conditioning Digital output 1
Controller
channel 1 Digital output 2

Analog input 4 Analog


value Digital output 3
conditioning Controller
channel 2 Digital output 4

Reference Digital output 5


junction for Controller
analog input 1 channel 3
to 4 Digital output 6

Digital output 7
Controller
Digital input 1
channel 4 Digital output 8

Digital input 8
Assignment of the inputs
to the controller channels
can be configured freely

Figure 3-2 Block Diagram of the FM 355 S (Step Controller)

Interconnection Possibilities of the FM 355 S


The function blocks of the FM 355 S do not have a fixed assignment to each other.
On the contrary, it is possible to interconnect them by means of configuration.
Each analog input has its own analog value conditioning (filtering, linearization,
normalization).
You can assign up to 4 analog inputs and up to 5 digital inputs to each controller
channel. Each controller channel can be interconnected to the conditioned analog
values, the digital inputs or also the output of another controller channel.
2 digital outputs each are assigned fixed to the 4 controller channels.

Controller Module FM 355


3-4 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.2 Basic Parameters

Overview
The FM 355 has basic parameters which deal with the interrupts and the reaction
to CPU STOP mode.

Basic Parameters
The basic parameters can be set under HW CONFIG in the Basic Parameters
menu. The following settings are possible:
• Generate interrupt
– Yes
– No
• Select interrupt
– None
– Diagnostic interrupt
• Reaction to CPU STOP mode
– Continue processing

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-5
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.3 Inputs of the FM 355

Overview
Various sensor types can be connected to the analog inputs. The input signals of
the sensors are then conditioned in accordance with the requirements.
The digital inputs can be used to switch the FM 355 to various operating modes.
Continuous controllers and step controllers have the same structure at analog and
digital inputs.

3.3.1 Analog Inputs

Sensor type

A
D
Conditioned
Filter Root Polyline Normalizing analog value
extraction

Reference
input

Configured

Figure 3-3 Analog Value Conditioning

Controller Module FM 355


3-6 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

The analog inputs can be adapted to various sensors by means of parameter


configuration. The following settings are possible:
• Analog input is not processed (for example, unused input)
• Current sensor 0 to 20 mA
• Current sensor 4 to 20 mA
• Voltage sensor 0 to 10 V
• Pt 100, –200 ... 850 °C
• Pt 100, –200 ... 556 °C (double resolution)
• Pt 100, –200 ... 130 °C (fourfold resolution)
• Thermoelements types B, J, K, R and S (analog input set to ±80 mV)
• Free thermoelement (analog input set to ±80 mV)
The analog inputs are configured in the ”Analog input” mask.

Adaptation to the Power Frequency


The input signal processing can be adapted to the power frequency in order to
suppress disturbances during the measurement of analog signals. The following
settings are possible:
• 50 Hz operation
• 60 Hz operation
The configuration is carried out in the ”Overview” screen of the FM 355:
Menu item Tools > Module Parameters

Changeover Celsius/Fahrenheit
Temperatures can be measured both in °C and in °F.
The configuration is carried out in the ”Overview” screen of the FM 355:
Menu item Tools > Module Parameters

Reference Junction
If you have set a thermoelement as a sensor at an analog input, you can connect a
Pt 100 at the reference junction input of the FM 355 in order compensate the
reference junction temperature at thermoelements. Alternatively, a fixed reference
junction temperature can be configured for this purpose.
The configuration is carried out in the ”Overview” screen of the FM 355:
Menu item Tools > Module Parameters
When the reference junction input is used, the sampling time of each controller is
increased by the conversion time for the reference junction input (refer to
Figures 3-32 and 3-33).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-7
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Analog Value Conditioning


The analog value conditioning offers various configurable possibilities of
conditioning input signals. The following table provides an overview of these
parameters and the adjustable values.

Parameter Adjustable Values Remarks


Resolution • 12 bits Conversion time 20 ms (50 Hz)
Conversion time 162/3 ms (60 Hz)
• 14 bits Conversion time 100 ms
Filter • On/Off First-order filter whose time
• Time constant in s response is specified by the time
constant
Square root • On/Off In order to linearize sensor signals
in which the process variable is
available as a physical variable
which have a quadratic relationship
to the measured process variable
Normalization • Bottom In order to convert the input signal
• Top into a different engineering unit by
linear interpolation between the
starting value (bottom) and the end
value (top)
Polyline • On/Off In order to linearize sensor
• 13 interpolation points characteristic curves
selectable in
– mA at current input
– mV at voltage input

Note
Normalization/Polyline: The conversion of the unit mA or mV into an engineering
unit is carried out via the polyline or – if it is not activated – via the normalization.
The polyline is used to linearize a free thermoelement or for any linearization.

Controller Module FM 355


3-8 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.3.2 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs are used to change over operating modes of the individual
controller channels.
The direction of control action of the digital inputs can be configured. The following
settings are possible for each of the eight digital inputs:
• High-active
• Low-active or open
The configuration is carried out in the ”Overview” screen of the FM 355:
Menu item Tools > Module Parameters
The following operating modes can be selected:
• Changeover to manipulated value specification via the FB PID_FM
• Changeover to tracking operation (manipulated-value specification via an
analog input)
• Changeover to safety manipulated value
You can furthermore specify the following signals via digital inputs for a step
controller:
• Position feedback: Actuating device at the upper limit stop
• Position feedback: Actuating device at the lower limit stop

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-9
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.4 Controller

Overview
The controllers of each channel of the FM 355 consist of the following blocks:
• Error signal formation
– Conditioning of the setpoint value and process variable
– Signal selection for setpoint value, process variable, differential input and
disturbance variable
• Control algorithm
– Temperature controller
– PID controller with dead band
• Controller output
– Manipulated value changeover
– Manipulated value conditioning
The configuration is carried out in the screens ”Error signal formation”, ”Control
algorithm” and ”Controller output”.
Figure 3-4 provides an overview of the structure of the controller.

Controlller

Error signal Control algorithm Controller output

Figure 3-4 Structure of the Controller

Controller Module FM 355


3-10 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Controller Type
You can set various controller types for each controller channel of an FM 355 C or
FM 355 S:
• Fixed setpoint or cascade controller
• Three-component controller
• Ratio/blending controller
You can select the following additional operating modes at the FM 355 S:
• Pulse controller
• Step controller with position feedback
• Step controller without position feedback

Error Signal Formation


The same basic structure is used for the error signal formation at all the controller
types implemented in the FM 355 C and FM 355 S.
An effective setpoint value and an effective process variable are formed from the
setpoint value and process variable by corresponding conditioning. When the
effective setpoint value and the effective process variable are subtracted, the error
signal results, which is fed to the controller.
A signal selection can be carried out for the setpoint value and process variable.
This results in universal possibilities of application for the FM 355 (refer to
Table 3-1).
The structures of the error signal formation differ depending on the selected
controller type. The differences are shown in Figures 3-5 to 3-8.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-11
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Setpoint value conditioning

Setpoint Effective
value setpoint
Switch Ramp Limit
safety value
setpoint Error
value signal

Interrupt
Process variable A Effective
process
variable

Differential input

Disturbance variable

Figure 3-5 Error Signal Formation in a Fixed Setpoint or Cascade Controller

At the cascade controller the manipulated value of a master controller is selected


as the setpoint value. In the example in Figure 3-6 the manipulated value of
controller 1 is selected as the setpoint value at controller 2.
If a fixed setpoint secondary controller is switched to manual mode (not
closed-loop control), the module automatically also switches the corresponding
master controller to manual mode and holds it to the last manipulated value. As
soon as the secondary controller has returned to closed-loop control the master
controller is also switched over to closed-loop control.
If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limitation or if the
setpoint-value slope of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the
setpoint-value branch, the integral component of the master controller is blocked
direction-specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the
secondary controller.

Controller Module FM 355


3-12 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

SP LMN QLMNUP
Controller 1 Process Process
Controller 2 segment 1 segment 2
QLMNDN
PV PV

Figure 3-6 Two-Loop Cascade Control

Setpoint preprocessing

Setpoint Effective
value setpoint
Switch Ramp Limit
safety value
setpoint Error
value signal

Total
Interrupt

Actual ∑ Effective
value A process
variable
Process variable B

Differential input
Process variable C

Disturbance variable

Figure 3-7 Signal Error Formation at a Three-Component Controller

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-13
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Setpoint conditioning Multiply

Setpoint Effective
value setpoint
Switch Ramp Limit/
safety normalize value
setpoint Error
value signal
Process variable D

Interrupt

Process variable A Effective


process
variable

Differential input

Disturbance variable

Figure 3-8 Error Signal Formation at a Ratio or Blending Controller

Figure 3-9 shows a blending control for three components:


The accumulated rate controller is implemented as a three-component
controller/pulse controller. The accumulated rate PV is calculated via its inputs
”process variable A, process variable B and process variable C”.
The secondary controllers are configured as ratio/blending controllers. The
manipulated variable of the master controller is interconnected via the input
process variable D. The factor FAC1 to FAC3 is specified via the setpoint-value of
the controller.
The manipulated variable LMN of the accumulated rate controller is specified in the
range of 0% to 100%. The secondary controller converts this variable at the
process variable input D into the range of the process variable A (the range of the
process variable A is the normalization values ”top” and ”bottom” of the selected
analog input).
If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limitation or if the
setpoint-value slope of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the
setpoint-value branch, the integral component of the master controller is blocked
direction-specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the
secondary controller.

Controller Module FM 355


3-14 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Accumulated
Main component
rate
SP LMN SP1 QLMNUP
– Controller X – Controller 1 QLMNDN Process 1
PV
FAC1 PV1

SP2 QLMNUP
X – Controller 2 QLMNDN Process 2 +

FAC2 PV2

SP3 QLMNUP
X – Controller 3 QLMNDN Process 3 +

FAC3
PV3

Figure 3-9 Blending Control for Three Components

Figure 3-10 shows a ratio control with two control loops:


Control loop 1 is configured as a fixed setpoint or cascade controller.
Controller 2 is configured as a ratio/blending controller. The process variable D of
controller 1 is selected as the process variable of controller 2. The ratio factor FAC
is specified via the setpoint value input of controller 2. If a controller output is
selected as the ratio factor FAC, the setpoint value is normalized by means of the
lower and upper limitation ”0 .. 100%” to the range ”Lower limitation .. upper
limitation”.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-15
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

If the manipulated variable of a secondary controller enters the limitation or if the


setpoint-value slope of a secondary controller is limited by the ramp function in the
setpoint-value branch, the integral component of the master controller is blocked
direction-specifically until the cause for the limitation has been eliminated in the
secondary controller.

SP1
Controller 1 LMN1 Process 1
PV1

X
SP2
Controller 2
LMN2 Process 2
PV2

Figure 3-10 Ratio Control with Two Control Loops

Signal Selection for Setpoint Value, Process Variable, Differential Input and
Disturbance Variable
You can carry out a selection under various signal sources for the setpoint value,
the process variables, the value of the differential input and the disturbance
variable of each controller channel. The following table provides an overview of the
signal selection possibilities.

Table 3-1 Signal Selection for Setpoint Value, Process Variable, Differential Input and
Disturbance Variable

Affected Values Selected Signal Source


Setpoint value • A value specified by the user program through the function
block
• The conditioned analog value of an analog input
• The manipulated value of another controller channel (if
controllers are cascaded)
Process variables A, • The conditioned analog value of an analog input
B and C (the process variables B and C can also be deactivated)

Process variable D • Zero


(the process variable D can also be deactivated)

Controller Module FM 355


3-16 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Table 3-1 Signal Selection for Setpoint Value, Process Variable, Differential Input and
Disturbance Variable, continued

Affected Values Selected Signal Source


Value for differential • The error signal after the dead band of the own controller
input (only relevant channel
for PD or PID • The conditioned analog value of an analog input
controller)
• The negated effective process variable of the own controller
channel
Disturbance variable • The conditioned analog value of an analog input
(the value zero can also be specified for the disturbance
variable)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-17
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Conditioning of the Setpoint Value


The conditioning of the setpoint value to the effective setpoint value can be
influenced by the following configuration possibilities:
• Switch safety setpoint
The following can be set here:
– A safety setpoint value
– The reaction of the FM 355 at a CPU failure
– The reaction of the FM 355 during the startup
The alternatives for the reaction of the FM 355 are:
– Setpoint value = Last setpoint value
– Setpoint value = Safety setpoint value
• Ramp
The rate of change of the setpoint value can be limited by selecting a ramp-up
time from the physical starting value to the end value.
• Limit/Normalize
If the setpoint value is specified by the function block or if it is the conditioned
analog value of an analog input, the setpoint value is limited to a selectable
lower and upper limitation.
If a controller output is selected as the setpoint value at a ratio controller, this
value acts as a factor for the multiplication of the process variable D. The
setpoint value which exists as a % at the input, is normalized in this case by
using the lower and upper limitations.
If the manipulated value of another controller is to be used as the setpoint value
at a fixed-setpoint or cascade controller (for example, during cascade control), it
is normalized to a physical value by means of the normalizing constant of the
selected process variable channel.
• Multiplying
In the case of a ratio controller the process variable A is used as the process
variable, while the process variable D is used as the ratio variable. The setpoint
value input is used as the ratio factor. It is continioned to the effective setpoint
value by multiplying it with the process variable D and adding an adjustable
offset. If the process variable D is deactivated, only the offset is added to the
setpoint value.

Conditioning of the Process Variable


In the controlling structures of a fixed-setpoint or cascade controller and ratio
controller the effective process variable is identical to the process variable A.
In the controlling structure of a three-component controller the effective process
variable is formed by summing the three process variables A, B and C and by
adding an adjustable offset. The process variables B and C can be weighted
additionally by means of factors.

Controller Module FM 355


3-18 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Interrupt
A limit monitoring function is implemented in the FM 355. This allows
• Either the error signal
• Or the effective process variable
to be monitored to an upper and lower warning limit and to an upper and lower
alarm limit. In addition you can set a hysteresis for these limits (refer to
Figure 3-11).

Lower warning or Upper warning or


alarm limit alarm limit
Interrupt coming
Interrupt going
Hysteresis

Figure 3-11 Hysteresis for Warning and Alarm Limit

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-19
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Control Algorithm
The following operating modes can be selected at the control algorithm:
• Temperature controller (self-tuning fuzzy controller)
• PID controller
Continuous controllers and step controllers have the same controller algorithm
structure (refer to Figure 3-12).

Effective setpoint value

Effective process Temperature


variable controller Effective
manipulated
PID value

Error signal
Dead band

Differential input
Manipulated value
correction

Disturbance variable

Figure 3-12 Block Diagram of the Control Algorithm

Controller Module FM 355


3-20 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Temperature Controller
The temperature controller is a self-tuning fuzzy controller which operates with
self-determined control parameters after identification of the process.
The following settings are possible at a temperature controller:
• Cooling controller
• Heating controller
• Aggressivity
The aggresivity parameter can be used to influence the speed of the transient
response.
Possible values for the aggressivity:
• –1 ≤ Aggressivity < 0 : Slower transient response than determined via
identification
• Aggressivity = 0 : Transient response as determined via
identification
• 0 < Aggressivity ≤ 1 : Faster transient response than determined via
identification
For a more detailed description of the temperature controller please refer to
Section 3.8 “Temperature Controller of the FM 355”.

Control Algorithm and Controller Structure


In the cycle of the planned sampling time the manipulated variable of the
continuously operating controller is calculated from the error signal in the
PID positioning algorithm. The controller is carried out in a pure parallel structure
(Figure 3-13). The proportional, integral or differential components can each be
deactiavted individually. In the case of the integral and differential components this
is done by setting the respective parameter TI or TD to zero.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-21
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

DISV_SEL
DISV

P_SEL
P
GAIN

ER X I + LMN

(linear combination)
D

Figure 3-13 Control Algorithm of the FM 355 (Parallel Structure)

Feedforward Control:
A disturbance variable DISV can additionally be applied to the output signal of the
controller. Activation and deactivation is carried out in the “Error signal” window of
the configuration tool by means of the switch “Signal selection disturbance variable
controller”.
PD Component in the Feedback:
In the parallel structure each component of the control algorithm receives the error
signal as the input signal. In this structure setpoint step changes act directly on the
controller. The manipulated variable is influenced directly via the proportional and
the derivative actions by means of setpoint step changes.
However, a different structure of the controller, in which the formation of the
proportional and the derivative action is laid into the feedback, ensures a smooth
course of the manipulated variable at step changes of the reference variable
(Figure 3-14). In this structure the Integral action processes the error signal as the
input signal. Only the negative process variable (factor = –1 is applied to the
proportional and the derivative action. At the derivative action the changeover is
carried out in the feedback in the “Error signal” window via the “Differential input
controller” switch by selecting the negated effective process variable as the input
signal. The input variable of the derivative action can also be selected via the
parameter D_EL_SEL of the function block PID_FM (refer to Section 7.1).

GAIN

ER X I

–1 P + LMN
PV X X
D

Figure 3-14 Control Algorithm with Proportional and Derivative Action in the
Feedback Path

Controller Module FM 355


3-22 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Reversing the Controller Action


Reversing, meaning the changeover of the controller of the assignment
Rising process variable = Rising manipulated variable to
Rising process variable = Falling manipulated variable,
is achieved by setting a negative proportional gain at the parameter GAIN. The
sign of this parameter value determines the direction of control action of the
controller

Proportional Control
At a proportional controller the integral and derivative actions are deactivated. This
means that if the error signal ER = 0, the manipulated variable = 0 as well. If an
operating point is to be ≠ 0, meaning that a numerical value is to be set for the
manipulated variable at the error signal zero, this can be achieved via the
operating point:
• Operating point automatically: The operating point is set by the controller to the
current (manual) manipulated variable during the manual-automatic
changeover.
• Operating point not automatically: You can configure the operating point.
Example: Operating point OP = 5% results in a manipulated variable
of 5% at error signal ER = 0.

P_SEL
P
GAIN

ER X I Automatically
+ LMN
Not automatically

Operating point

Figure 3-15 Proportional Controller with Operating-Point Setting via the


Integral Action

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-23
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

ER Manipulated variable (t)


Manipulated
variable

ER(t)

Figure 3-16 Step Response of the Proportional Controller

Proportional-Plus-Integral Control
The derivative action is deactivated at the PI controller. A PI controller adjusts the
output variable via the integral action until the error signal has become ER = 0.
However, this only applies if the output variable does not exceed the limits of the
manipulating range in the process. If the manipulated value limits are exceed, the
integral action retains the value reached at the limit (anti reset wind-up).

ER
Manipulated Manipulated
variable variable (t)

GAIN * ER0
GAIN * ER(t)
GAIN * ER0 ER(t)
t
TI

Figure 3-17 Step Response of the PI Controller

Smooth Manual-Automatic Changeover


In order to change over ”smoothly” from manual mode to automatic mode of the
PI/PID controller, the integrator is tracked in manual mode so that the manipulated
variable does not take a step through the proportional and derivative actions during
the manual-automatic changeover. An existing error signal is only compensated
slowly via the integral action. If a smooth manual-automatic changeover is not
selected, the manipulated variable takes a step which corresponds to the current
error signal from the current manual value during the manual-automatic
changeover. An existing error signal is thus compensated rapidly.

Controller Module FM 355


3-24 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Integral-Action Control
You can deactivate the proportional action in order to realize a pure integral-action
control. This is also possible via the parameter P_SEL of the function
block PID_FM.

Proportional-Plus-Derivative Control
The integral action is deactivated at the PD controller. This means that if the error
signal ER = 0, the output signal = 0 as well. If an operating point is to be ≠ 0,
meaning that a numerical value is to be set for the manipulated variable at the
error signal zero, this can be achieved via the operating point:
• Operating point automatically: The operating point is set by the controller to the
current (manual) manipulated variable during the manual-automatic
changeover.
• Operating point not automatically: You can configure the operating point.
The PD controller images the input variable ER(t) proportionally to the output
signal and adds the differential component formed by the differentiation of ER(t),
which is calculated with double-precision according to the trapezoid rule (Padé
approximation). The time response is determined by the derivative action time
constant TD.
In order to smoothen the signal and to suppress noises a first-order delay
(adjustable time constant: TM_LAG) is integrated into the algorithm for forming the
derivative action. Usually a small value for TM_LAG is sufficient to achieve the
desired effect.

ER
Manipulated
variable

GAIN * TD ER0 Manipulated variable (t)


TM_LAG

ER(t)
GAIN * ER0

TM_LAG t

Figure 3-18 Step Response of the PD Controller

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-25
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

PID Closed-Loop Control


At a PID closed-loop controller the proportional, integral and derivative actions are
activated. A PID controller adjusts the output variable via the integral action until
the error signal has become ER = 0. However, this only applies if the output
variable does not exceed the limits of the manipulating range in the process. If the
manipulated value limits are exceeded, the integral action retains the value
reached at the limit (anti reset wind-up).
The PID controller images the input variable ER(t) proportionally to the output
signal and adds the components formed by the differentiation and integration of
ER(t), which are calculated with double-precision according to the trapezoid rule
(Padé approximation). The time response is determined by the derivative-action
time constant TD and the integral-action time constant TI.
In order to smoothen the signal and to suppress noises a first-order delay
(adjustable time constant: TM_LAG) is integrated into the algorithm for forming the
derivative action. Usually a small value for TM_LAG is sufficient to achieve the
desired effect.

ER
Manipulated
variable

GAIN * TD  ER Manipulated variable (t)


0
TM_LAG

GAIN * ER0
ER(t)
GAIN * ER0
t
TM_LAG
TI

Figure 3-19 Step Response of the PID Controller

Use and Configuration of the PID Controller


The configuration of the PI/PID controller, i.e. finding the ”correct” setting values for
the controller parameters, is a great practical problem. The quality of this
configuration is of decisive importance for ensuring that the PID closed-loop control
functions in accordance with the task and requires either great practical
experience, special knowledge or a high degree of time.
The Optimize PID controller function included in the configuration tool allows
the initial setting of the controller parameter by means of adaptive starting up. In
this case the process model is determined after a process identification and then
the most favorable (optimal) setting values for the controller parameter are
calculated from it. This procedure, which is automatic to a great extent, makes it
unnecessary for the user to ”trim” the installed PID controller online manually.

Controller Module FM 355


3-26 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Dead Band
The PID controller is preceded by a dead band. In a steady controller state the
dead band suppresses the noise component in the signal of the error signal which
can arise by a higher-frequency noise being superimposed on the controlled or
reference variable, and can thus prevent undesired oscillating of the controller
output.
The dead band width can be set. If the error signal lies within the set dead band
width, the value 0 (error signal = 0) is output at the output of the dead band. Not
until the input variable leaves the sensitivity range does the output change by the
same value as the input variable (refer to Figure 3-20).
This results in a corruption of the transferred signal - also outside the dead band.
However, this is put up with in order to avoid steps at the limits of the dead band.
The corruption corresponds to the value of the dead band width and can therefore
be controlled easily.

Error signal at the


dead band output

Error signal at the


dead band input

Dead band
width

Figure 3-20 Dead Band

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-27
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Controller Output
The controller output block of the control unit is structured differently at the
continuous controller and at the three operating modes of the step controller.
Various interconnection possibilities have been realized for the manipulated value,
the tracking input and the safety manipulated value at the controller output
(manipulated value changeover).
A limitation is provided in order to ensure that the manipulated value cannot
assume invalid values for the process.
The split-range function creates two different output signals: manipulated value A
and manipulated value B, which can be normalized differently from the
manipulated value as the input signal. This allows, for example, two valves to be
controlled with one manipulated value.
The control output correction prevents a manipulated-variable step jump during the
changeover from manual to automatic mode. The manipulated variable remains
the same when switching between manual and automatic. The control output
correction is not active, if a pure P controller with fixed operating point has been
implemented (”automatic” is not checked in the PID controller screen).
Figures 3-21, 3-24, 3-27 and 3-28 show the block diagrams of the controller output
at the continuous controller and at the three operating modes of the step controller.

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external
value manipulated Manipulated
value value

Manipulated
Switch Switch Limit Split-range value A
correction safety
manipulated
value
Tracking input Manipulated
value B

Manipulated value correction

Figure 3-21 Continuous Controller Output

Controller Module FM 355


3-28 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Split Range
The split-range function allows two control valves to be controlled with one
manipulated variable. The split-range function creates the two output signals
manipulated value A and manipulated value B from the manipulated value LMN as
the input signal.
Figure 3-22 shows the effect of the parameters for the output manipulated value A.

Output signal
manipulated value A

End of range
for output signal

Start of range for


output signal

Input signal
manipulated
value LMN
Start of range End of range
for input signal for input signal

Figure 3-22 Split-Range Function Manipulated Value A

Figure 3-23 shows the effect of the parameters for the output manipulated value B.

Output signal
manipulated value B

Start of range for


output signal

End of range for


output signal

Input signal
manipulated
Start of range End of range value LMN
for input signal for input signal

Figure 3-23 Split-Range Function Manipulated Value B

The start of range of the input signal must be smaller than the end of range of the
input signal.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-29
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Analog Output
At the analog output you can select for each channel which signal is to be output.
This is usually the manipulated value A of a controller. However, you can also
select the manipulated value B of a controller or also an analog input value. The
latter can be used to linearize an analog value. Thus, for example, a signal
supplied by a thermoelement can be linearized and converted to 0 to 10 V.

Controller Output at the Pulse Controller

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external
value manipulated Manipulated
value value

Switch Switch Limit Split-range/


correction safety pulse shaper
manipulated
value
Tracking input

Manipulated value correction

Figure 3-24 Step Controller Output (Pulse Controller Mode)

Split-Range/Pulse Shaper
The split-range function is the preparation of the analog signal for conversion to a
binary signal.
In the case of a two-step controller (for example, a heating controller) only the
manipulated value A is relevant. Figure 3-25 shows the conversion of the
manipulated value to the manipulated value A. The conversion to a binary output
signal is carried out so that the ratio of the pulse length to the period time
corresponds to the manipulated value A at the corresponding digital output.
For example, a manipulated value A of 40% at a period time of 60 seconds results
in a pulse length of 24 seconds and a pause length of 36 seconds.
The assignment of the digital outputs to the controller channels is shown in
Table 3-3.

Controller Module FM 355


3-30 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Output signal
manipulated value A

End of range
for output signal

Input signal
manipulated
Start of range for Start of range End of range value LMN
output signal for input signal for input signal

Figure 3-25 Split-Range Function Two-Step Controller

In the case of a three-step controller (for example, a heating and cooling


controller) the statements above also apply for the manipulated value A. The
second signal for controlling the cooling is formed via the manipulated value B.
Figure 3-26 shows the conversion of the manipulated value to the manipulated
values A and B. The conversion to a binary output signal is carried out so that the
ratio of the pulse length to the period time corresponds to the manipulated value A
or B at the corresponding digital outputs.
The assignment of the digital outputs to the controller channels is shown in
Table 3-3.

Output signals Manipulated


Start of range output manipulated value A value A
signal manipulated and B
value B Manipulated
value B

Input signal
manipulated
Start of range input End of range End of range output value LMN
signal manipulated input signal signal manipulated
value B manipulated value B value B

Figure 3-26 Split-Range Function Three-Step Controller

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-31
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Controller Output at the Step Controller

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external
value manipulated Manipulated
value value

Switch Switch Limit


correction safety Pulse
manipulated shaper
value
Tracking input

Manipulated value correction

Position feedback input

Figure 3-27 Step Controller Output (Step Controller with Position Feedback Mode)

External manipulated
value

Effective Switch Switch Pulse


manipulated external safety shaper
value manipulated manipulated
value value

Figure 3-28 Step Controller Output (Step Controller without Position Feedback Mode)

In the case of a step controller without analog position feedback the external
manipulated value and the safety manipulated value act as follows:
If a value between 40.0% and 60.0% is specified, no binary output is set and the
actuating element remains unchanged.
If a value > 60.0% is specified, “Actuating signal high” is output as long as the
feedback ”Actuating device at upper stop” responds.
Table 3-2 lists the functions of the controller output and the setting possibilities.

Controller Module FM 355


3-32 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Table 3-2 Functions of the Controller Output and Setting Possibilities

Functions of the Adjustable Parameters


Controller Output
Switch external manipulated The changeover between the external manipulated value and the
value effective manipulated value from the controller can alternatively be
carried out by
• A binary value from the function block
• A signal which results from the ORing of a binary value from the
function block and a digital input
Tracking input There are the following alternative settings:
• The tracking input has the value zero
• The tracking input is the conditioned analog value of an analog input
Position feedback input There are the following alternative settings:
(only step controller) • The position feedback input has the value zero
• The position feedback input is the conditioned analog value of an
analog input
Switch tracking Changing over between the manipulated value and the tracking input is
carried out alternatively by
• A binary value from the function block
• A signal which results from the ORing of a binary value from the
function block and a digital input
Switch safety manipulated • Specifying the safety manipulated value
value • Alternative reaction of the FM 355 during the startup:
– The FM 355 changes to closed-loop control
– The safety manipulated value is output as the safety manipulated
value
• The changeover to the safety manipulated value is carried out
alternatively by
– A binary value from the function block
– A signal which results from the ORing of a binary value from the
function block and a digital input
• Reaction at a measuring transducer fault of the process variable A:
– At the setting ”Closed-loop control” the operating mode of the
controller remains unchanged
– At the setting ”Manipulated value = Safety manipulated value” the
system changes over to the safety manipulated value
• Reaction at a measuring transducer fault of an analog input:
– At the setting ”Closed-loop control” the operating mode of the
controller remains unchanged
– At the setting ”Manipulated value = Safety manipulated value” the
system changes over to the safety manipulated value
Manipulated value limiting Upper and lower limitation (cannot be deactivated)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-33
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Table 3-2 Functions of the Controller Output and Setting Possibilities, continued

Functions of the Adjustable Parameters


Controller Output
Forming of the split-range • On/Off (only continuous controllers)
manipulated values • Starting and end value of the input signal
• Starting and end value of the output signal
Pulse shaper • Motor actuating time
(only step controller) • Minimum pulse time
• Minimum pause time

Controller Module FM 355


3-34 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.5 Outputs of the FM 355

Analog Outputs of the FM 355 C


You can carry out the following specifications for each analog output of the
FM 355 C by means of configuration:
• Signal selection
• Signal type
The outputs are configured in the screens ”Signal selection analog output” and
”Signal type analog output”.

Signal Selection at the Analog Outputs


With the signal selection you can specify which signal value is output at the analog
output.
The following signal values can be configured:
• The value zero
• The conditioned analog value of one of the four analog inputs
• The manipulated value A of one of the four controller channels
• The manipulated value B of one of the four controller channels

Signal Type at the Analog Outputs


You can determine the signal type for each analog output.
The following signal types can be configured:
• Current output 0 to 20 mA
• Current output 4 to 20 mA
• Voltage output 0 to 10 V
• Voltage output –10 to 10 V

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-35
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Digital Outputs of the FM 355 S


The digital outputs of the FM 355 S are used to control integrating or
non-integrating final controlling elements
Table 3-3 shows the assignment of the digital outputs to the controller channels
and their meaning:

Table 3-3 Assignment and Meaning of the Digital Outputs

Controller Digital Outputs Meaning of the Digital Assignment of the


Channel Assigned to the Outputs at the Step Digital Outputs at the
Controller Channel Controller Pulse Controller
1 Open Manipulated value A
1
2 Close Manipulated value B
3 Open Manipulated value A
2
4 Close Manipulated value B
5 Open Manipulated value A
3
6 Close Manipulated value B
7 Open Manipulated value A
4
8 Close Manipulated value B

Open = Open the actuating element


Close = Close the actuating element

Controller Module FM 355


3-36 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.6 Control Action Mechanisms and Data Management in the


FM 355

Overview
This section describes important control action mechanisms and the data
management principle in the FM 355.
The parameter configuration interface on the programming device/personal
computer can be used to
• Configure,
• Optimize,
• Control and monitor the FM 355
The function block (FB) PID_FM included in the FM 355 can be used to
interconnect the module to a user program.

Parameter Configuration
The FM 355 is configured with the parameter configuration interface on the
programming device (refer to Chapter 5). All the parameter configuration data are
saved in an SDB on the programming device.

Note
You can only download the SDB parameter configuration data via an online
connection between the programming device and the CPU to the CPU and to the
FM 355 if the CPU is in STOP mode. This is only possible via the HW Config. The
parameter configuration interface must have been closed.

The parameters are transferred from the SDB in the CPU to the FM 355 during
every startup and during the transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Downloading the Parameters Directly to the FM 355


You can also download the parameters via the parameter configuration interface
directly to the FM 355 so that you do not have to close the parameter configuration
interface and set the CPU to STOP mode several times consecutively while testing
your configuration during setting up. Please note that the downloaded parameters
are overwritten by the values from the SDB of the CPU when the CPU is started
up and during the CPU transition from STOP to RUN. An FB call can also
overwrite the parameters downloaded directly from the parameter configuration
interface.
Downloading to the FM 355 therefore only makes sense in order to test the
configuration during the setup.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-37
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

If you change parameters via the parameter configuration interface and then
download them directly to the FM 355, jumps can occur in the manipulated value
course. We recommend the following procedure in order to achieve a controlled
manipulation value course:
1. Switch to manual mode (for example, via the loop display).
2. Change the parameters.
3. Download directly to the FM 355.
4. Switch to automatic mode (for example, via the loop display).

Flow of Data when Configuring via the Parameter Configuration Interface


Figure 3-29 shows the path of the configuration data from the parameter
configuration interface to the FM 355.

Parameter
configuration
software

HW Config

Programming
Offline device
data
management
Download directly to FM

Download
from
HW Config
CPU FM 355

System
data
Downloading of the
system data during
startup and
STOP → RUN of the CPU

Figure 3-29 Configuring the FM 355 via the Programming Device and via the CPU

Controller Module FM 355


3-38 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Connecting the FM 355 to the User Program


You have to use the FB PID_FM if you want to change the control parameters (for
example, controller gain, integration coefficient) of the FM 355 from the user
program or by operator control at the programming device. Assign an instance DB
to this FB for each controller channel which you want to use (refer to Chapters 7
and 11). If the parameter LOAD_PAR is set when the FB PID_FM is called by the
user program, all the controller parameters of the FB are transferred to the
FM 355. Controller parameters are all the parameters which lie in the instance data
block after the variable cont_par.
The parameters in the instance DB have a default setting. These default settings
can be changed with the STL/LAD Editor.

Note
You must first call the FB PID_FM once with COM_RST = TRUE in the
CPU startup so that the parameters which you do not want to change are not
overwritten with the default values from the instance DB. The FB PID_FB then
reads the parameters – which were transferred from the CPU to the FM
beforehand – from the FM 355 and saves them in its instance DB. You can now
change individual parameters and transfer all the parameters to the FM 355 with
LOAD_PAR = TRUE.
Please note that the parameters in the FM 355 are overwritten by the values from
the system data whenever the CPU is started up (transition from STOP to RUN).

CPU FM 355
System
data

Downloading of the
system data,
Startup,
STOP → RUN of CPU
Instance FB
DB of the PID_FM
FB PID_FM LOAD_PAR = TRUE

COM_RST = TRUE

Figure 3-30 Configuration of the FM 355 via the System Data and via the FB PID_FM

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-39
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

The operating parameters (for example, setpoint value, manual manipulated value)
of the FM 355 are transferred cyclically from the FB PID_FM to the FM 355.
Operating parameters are all the parameters, which lie in the instance data block
between the variables op_par and cont_par. In order for the data transfer to be
possible without a high run time in the CPU, transferring is normally carried out via
direct I/O accesses, not via the SFC WR_REC. The data are multiplexed since
only four bytes per channel are available in the I/O address area of the module. It
can therefore take up to three cycles of the CPU or of the FM 355 until the
operating values have been transferred to the FM 355 – the respectively longer
cycle is decisive.
If you set the parameter LOAD_OP = TRUE, the operating parameters are then
transferred in one program cycle via the SFC WR_REC to the module. However,
this requires more run time (refer to Technical Specifications).
The process values (for example, process variable, manipulated value) can also be
read by the FB PID_FM via direct I/O accesses. This transmission does not
require much run time, however the following functional restrictions result. If the
parameter READ_VAR = TRUE is set, then the process values are read from the
FM 355 by means of the SFC RD_REC. However, this requires more run time
(refer to Technical Specifications).
Functional restrictions when READ_VAR is not set:
• The variables SP (setpoint variable from the FM), ER (error signal), DISV
(disturbance variable), LMN_A and LMN_B (refer to Chapter ”Assignment of the
instance DBs) are not updated.
• The data are multiplexed. The process variable and manipulated value and the
binary displays are not updated again until after four calls of the block.
• If the setpoint value and the manual manipulated variable were operated via the
continuous controller, these operating values are not updated (read out of the
FM) by the FB during the CPU startup.

Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 by Means of the OP via the
FB PID_FM
Operator control and monitoring of the FM 355 is possible via the FB PID_FM.
If one of the following parameters ”Operating setpoint value SP_OP”, “Operating
manipulated variable LMN_OP” and the corresponding switches “SP_OP_ON” and
“LMNOP_ON” were changed by operation via the OP, the FB PID_FM takes over
these values from the FM after the CPU has been started up, if the parameter
READ_VAR = TRUE is set.

Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355 by Means of the OP via the MPI
A maximum of three connections from the FM 355 to the OPs can be
implemented.
Operator control of the FM 355 with the OP is only possible in the STOP mode of
the CPU or at a CPU failure.

Controller Module FM 355


3-40 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Monitoring of the FM 355 with the OP is always possible.


The variable interface of the FM 355 contains four data blocks with the block
numbers 101 to 104 for the controller channels 1 to 4 (refer to Figure 3-31). These
data blocks are described in Section 11.8 “Assignment of the DBs for Operator
Control and Monitoring via OP”.

Note
The contents of the data blocks 101 to 104 do not automatically reflect the
parameter value effective at the FM 355. Parameters changed with the OP are
only transferred to the FM 355 after the operating bits LOAD_PAR or LOAD_OP
have been set.
If you use OP operator control to change a parameter without setting the
corresponding operating bit, the modified parameter value exists in the data block,
but the FM 355 continues to operate internally with the unchanged old value of the
parameter.
After the operating bits have been set and the parameters have been transferred
to the FM 355, the operating bits LOAD_PAR or LOAD_OP are reset by the
FM 355.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-41
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

OP

Operation and monitoring in Operation only in STOP mode of


RUN mode of the CPU the CPU or ar CPU failure;
Monitoring

CPU FM 355

DB 101
to 104

**
FB Max. of 4
PID_FM instance
DBs of the **
FB PID_FM Parameters
*

* Controlled by the parameter READ_VAR of the instance DB


** Controlled by the parameters LOAD_OP and LOAD_PAR

Figure 3-31 Operator Control and Monitoring of the FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


3-42 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.7 Properties of the FM 355

Overview
This section provides information on
• Processing sequence and sampling time,
• Controlling for operation,
• Startup characteristics,
• Backup operation
• Firmware update

Processing Sequence
The FM 355 operates the analog inputs and controller channels in a specified
sequence. Every controller channel is processed directly after the analog input with
the same number has been processed and conditioned. This is followed by the
processing of the analog input with the next higher number, etc. The reference
junction is processed after controller channel 4. Figure 3-32 shows the processing
sequence of the FM 355.

Conversion times (example)

Reference 100 ms
Startup junction for
analog input 1
to 4

Analog input 1 20 ms Controller


channel 1

Analog input 2 20 ms Controller


channel 2

Analog input 3 100 ms Controller


channel 3

Analog input 4 20 ms Controller


channel 4

Figure 3-32 Processing Sequence of the FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-43
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Sampling Time
The common sampling time of all the controllers of the FM 355 results from the
sum of the conversion time of the individual analog inputs. The conversion time for
the reference junction, if used, is added to this result.
The conversion time of an analog input depends on the resolution, the power
frequency and controller type used (refer to Table 3-4):

Table 3-4 Conversion Time of an Analog Input

Resolution Power Controller Type Conversion Time of an


Frequency Analog Input
60 Hz No temperature 16 2/3 ms
12 bits
controller
50 Hz No temperature 20 ms
12 bits
controller
14 bits No temperature
50 or 60 Hz 100 ms
controller
12 or 14 bits 50 or 60 Hz Temperature controller 100 ms

If an analog input is not processed, the controller channel with the same number is
not processed either (conversion time = 0).
No additional conversion times result for the analog outputs. The analog output
values of the FM 355 are output immediately after calculation of the corresponding
initial values.
Table 3-5 contains further rules for the conversion time of the reference junction
input.

Table 3-5 Rules for the Conversion Time

If ... Then ...


a resolution of 12 bits was selected at all the the reference junction requires the same
analog inputs, conversion time as an analog input.
the higher resolution of 14 bits was selected
at even only one analog input, the reference junction requires a conversion
one of the controllers was configured as a time of 100 ms.
temperature controller,

The sampling time is shown in the parameter configuration interface in the menu
Tools > Module Parameters.

In the example of Figure 3-32 the following sampling time results for each
controller (at 50 Hz power frequency):
tsampling = 100 ms + 20 ms + 20 ms + 100 ms + 20 ms = 260 ms

Controller Module FM 355


3-44 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Figure 3-33 shows an example of the processing sequence when only three analog
inputs are used.

Conversion times (example)

Reference 20 ms
Startup junction for
analog input 1
to 4

Analog input 1 20 ms Controller


channel 1

Analog input 2 20 ms Controller


channel 2

Analog input 3 Not used Controller


(0 ms) channel 3

Analog input 4 20 ms Controller


channel 4

Figure 3-33 Processing Sequence of the FM 355

In the example of Figure 3-33 the following sampling time results for each
controller (at 50 Hz power frequency):
tsampling = 20 ms + 20 ms + 20 ms + 0 ms + 20 ms = 80 ms

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-45
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Rules for Operating the FM 355


The following rules can be summarized for operation with the FM 355:
• The controllers of the FM 355 can be cascaded freely. This means that you can
switch the manipulated value of a controller channel to the setpoint value of
another controller channel.
• The processing of a controller channel is carried out immediately after the
conditioning of the analog input wth the same number.
If a controller uses several analog inputs, you should select the controller
channel whose number corresponds to the highest number of the analog inputs
used in order to reduce the dead times.
Example: A controller requires the signals of the analog inputs 1, 2 and 3. The
smallest dead time results if the controller No. 3 is selected.
• If you select the setting ”Analog input is not processed” at an analog input, the
controller channel with the same number is not processed either. No additional
sampling time is thus required for this analog input.
• If the reference junction input is used, it requires the same conversion time as
the analog input with the highest conversion time.
• The sampling time of a controller is the sum of the conversion times of the
analog inputs used plus the conversion time of the reference junction input.

Startup Characteristics
During the startup the FM 355 first takes over the current parameters from your
EEPROM and begins to control with these parameters. These are overwritten by
the CPU with the parameters from the system data as soon as the P bus
connection between the CPU and the FM 355 has been established. If the system
data do not contain any parameters for the controller, the module continues to
control with the parameters contained in the EEPROM. The FM 355 does not know
a change to default parameters.
The following configurable possibilities exist for the manipulated value at a restart
after a failure of the power supply:
• The controller begins with the safety manipulated value.
This setting remains effective until it is reversed by the user program via the
function block.
• The controller changes over to closed-loop control
The following configurable possibilities exist for the setpoint value at a restart
after a failure of the power supply:
• The last setpoint value valid remains effective.
• The system changes over to the safety setpoint value.
This changeover only remains effective until the setpoint value is specified by
the user program via the function block. Otherwise the setpoint value is
specified by an analog input or controller output depending on the configuration.

Controller Module FM 355


3-46 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Startup Characteristics in an S7-300 and Own Power Supply of the FM 355


If the FM 355 has its own 24-V power supply independent of the CPU in an
S7-300 system, the communication link of the CPU to the FM 355 is interrupted if
there is a failure and return of the 24-V power supply of the FM 355. This is
indicated as follows:
• In the FB PID_FM the output parameter RET_VALU contains an error value.
• The CPU does not change to the RUN state due to the error cause of a
configuration error.
In order to reestablish the communications between the CPU and the FM 355,
proceed as described below for the CPUs or devices listed below:

CPU/ Order No. Procedure


Device
313 6ES7 313-1AD00-0AB0
314 6ES7 314-1AE00-0AB0
6ES7 314-1AE01-0AB0
314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE00-0AB0
315 6ES7 315-1AF00-0AB0
315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF00-0AB0
614 6ES7 614-1AH00-0AB0
Swith the supply voltage of the CPU
C7-623 6ES7 623-1AE00-0AE3 off and on again.
6ES7 623-1CE00-0AE3
C7-624 6ES7 624-1AE00-0AE3
6ES7 624-1CE00-0AE3
C7-626 6ES7 626-1AG00-0AE3
6ES7 626-2AG00-0AE3
6ES7 626-1CG00-0AE3
6ES7 626-2CG00-0AE3

Proceed as follows for the CPUs listed below:

CPU Order No. Procedure


313 6ES7 313-1AD01-0AB0
314 6ES7 314-1AE02-0AB0
314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE01-0AB0 Bring the CPU to the STOP state and
315 6ES7 315-1AF01-0AB0 then back to the RUN state.

315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF01-0AB0


614 6ES7 614-1AH01-0AB0

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-47
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

The technological function of the FM 355 is not influenced by this communication


fault. Depending on the configuration the controllers of the FM 355 start with one of
the following operating modes:
• Closed-loop control
– Controlling with the safety setpoint value
– Controlling with the last valid setpoint value
• Manipulated value = Safety manipulated value

Backup Operation
If the CPU goes into STOP mode or fails or the connection of the FM 355 to the
CPU fails, the FM 355 changes over to backup mode and continues to control with
the parameters applying at the time of the fault. The FM 355 uses either the last
setpoint value or the safety setpoint value depending on the configuration.
This is indicated by the yellow ”Backup” LED.
In backup operation the FM 355 can be operated directly via the OP. As soon as
the CPU returns to RUN mode, the FM 355 can no longer be operated via the OP
(refer to Section 3.6).

Firmware Update
In order to extend functions and remedy faults it is possible to download firmware
updates to the operating system memory of the FM 355. This functionality is
described in the online help of the parameter configuration interface.

Controller Module FM 355


3-48 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

3.8 Parameter Optimization at the Temperature Controller

Requirements to the Process at the Temperature Controller


The following requirements should be sufficient in order to achieve optimal
controlling by means of the temperature controller:
• In case of bath heatings the liquid to be heated must be mixed well.
• In the case of bath-to-bath control systems both liquids must be mixed well. At
the same time good heat transitions must be ensured between all the heat
exchanging media. In the case of materials with bad heat transfer properties
large transition surfaces should ensure good heat transferring.
• In the case of ambient-air temperature control systems thorough mixing (for
example, with fans) must be ensured.
• The process gain may not exceed the factor 3.
• The dead time may amount to a maximum of 3% of the delay time.
• The temperature to be controlled should not change by more than 1 ‰ of the
specified maximum temperature within the sampling time of the controller at the
maximum manipulated variable output.

Classification of the Processes


A process is characterized by parameters such as the heat output, the heating
mass or the thermal capacity of the medium to be heated. With regard to a fuzzy
controller ”critical” and ”non-critical” temeprature processes are differentiated as
follows: The control system becomes more critical
• the higher the heat output,
• the higher the thermal capacity of the heating,
• the lower the thermal capacity of the medium to be heated,
• the higher the heat transfer resistance,
• the smaller the heat transfer surface is.
After a manipulated value step has been applied to the process, it reacts with a
step response. The process can also be classified on the basis of this step
response: The control system becomes more critical the higher the ratio tu/ta is and
the higher the process gain is. If tu/ta < 1/10, the process is uncritical (refer to
Figure 3-34).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-49
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Step response of the


process to a
manipulated value
jump

ta t
tu
tu: Dead time
ta: Delay time

Figure 3-34 Step Response of the Process to a Manipulated Value Jump

Parameter Optimization at a Temperature Controller


Parameter optimization is based on a self-tuning fuzzy controller
In order for the temperature controller to operate optimally, an identification of the
process must take place. For this purpose the identification must be activated by
the parameter FUZID_ON = 1 in the instance DB of the function block PID_FM
and a setpoint value step of ≥12% must take place.
The identification of the process begins with a monitoring phase with no heat
output. The duration of the monitoring phase is as follows:
• Monitoring phase of the continuous controller: Approx. 1 min
• Monitoring phase of the step controller: Approx. 1 min + 1/2 × actuating
time
This period is used to establish the temperature trends in the heating medium.
Then the maximum heat output of 100% is output. This is indicated at the output
parameter LMN in the instance DB of the function block PID_FM.
The range of the first 4% temperature increase of the setpoint value range is used
for identification, whereby information on the process behavior is obtained on the
basis of the elapsed time at 1% and 4% of the temperature increase.

Controller Module FM 355


3-50 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

The identification is completed when the heat output drops below 100%. This
behavior can be used in order, for example, to deactivate the identification via the
user program. After the identification phase the controller continues to operate with
the determined parameters.
At every further setpoint value step ≥12% a renewed identification is carried out,
unless the identification has been deactivated again with FUZID_ON = FALSE.
If the setpoint value step is not corrected and the heat output remains permanently
at zero, the identification is terminated unsuccessfully - meaning that the controller
cannot control the connected process.

Prerequisites for Identification


As far as possible you must ensure that the process has settled before
identification (no heating or cooling process) or is changing slowly and
monotonically. The criterion can be that the temperature change approximates a
straight line during a period of one minute. In the case of faster processes this
requirement is of particular importance.
Since the controller outputs the manipulated variable zero for approximately one
minute at the beginning of identification, the temperature to be controlled must lie
near the ambient temperature.

How to Start Identification


In order to sart identification you must first change the controller over to
optimization mode. This is achieved by setting the bit FUZID_ON in the
instance DB of the FB PID_FM either from the user program or via the the
parameter configuration tool:
Call: Debug > Controller Optimization
The identification is started by a positive setpoint value step, whereby the following
conditions must be fulfilled:
• 1st condition: The minimum step size: Setpoint value step > 5 degrees
• 2nd condition: The setpoint value after the step:
Setpoint value after > Process variable + Setpoint value limitation * 0.12
with setpoint value limitation = Upper setpoint value limit of the controller
It is also possible to restart the identification by reducing and then increasing the
setpoint value. The setpoint value must fulfil condition 2 after the increase.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-51
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Completing the Identification


As long as the bit FUZID_ON = TRUE, the next identification is started whenever
there is a sufficiently large setpoint value step. For this reason we recommend
deactivating the optimization mode (FUZID_ON = FALSE) immediately after
identification has been completed.
Information on the state of identification can be obtained by using the parameter
IDSTATUS of the FB CH_DIAG (refer to Page 3-53).

Aborting Identification
Identification can be aborted in the following cases:
• By the controller if a ”critical” process is identified. After aborting the controller is
in the fault state. This state is indicated by the fact that the manipulated variable
is set back permanently by the controller. This does not change either when
optimization is deactivated. The fault state is deleted when a new identification
is started.
Information on the state of identification can be obtained by using the
parameter IDSTATUS of the FB CH_DIAG (refer to Page 3-53).
• By the operator creating a negative setpoint value step which must lie below
condition 2 (see above, “How to Start Identification”).

Note
Deactivating the optimization mode FUZID_ON=0 before identification has been
completed, does not stop identification. An identification which has been started
continues to run - unless the setpoint value step is negative.

Process Behavior at Different Processes


In the case of an ”uncritical” process there are no problems, neither in the
identification nor in the control system.
The identification of a process which is ”too critical” is aborted. Controlling of an
identified ”critical” process is carried out very ”carefully” or slowly.

Controller Module FM 355


3-52 A5E00059344-02
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Controller State Information


The parameter IDSTATUS of the function block FB CH_DIAG provides information
on the state of the identification.

X A I F
215 20

Figure 3-35 IDSTATUS Parameter of the FB CH_DIAG

The IDSTATUS parameter contains the four hexadecimal values X, A, I and F.


Their meanings are as follows:

X: Without any meaning (always 0)

A: Action number:
0 = Manual mode (or not closed-loop control respectively);
2 = Closed-loop control;
4 = Optimization activated (FUZID_ON = true);
6 = Transition state from manual mode to 2 or 4;

I: Display “Identification running” and “Parameters determined but not saved in


EEPROM yet”
0 = Identification not running, but no new parameters determined
1 = Identification running, but no new parameters determined
2 = Identification not running, new parameters determined but not saved yet
in EEPROM
3 = Identification running, new parameters determined but not saved yet in
EEPROM

F: Error number:
0 = No error
4 = Process variable step too high during identification
5 = Ratio of dead time to system time constant too high or highly non-linear
behavior of the process.
6 = Temperature drop or rise to great at the start of the identification.
Process not settled sufficiently.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 3-53
How Does the FM 355 Controller Module Work?

Controller Module FM 355


3-54 A5E00059344-02
Installing and Removing the FM 355 4
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter contains information on installing and removing the FM 355.
• You will learn what to take into account when installing. You will get notes and
hints on configuring an FM 355 and on where and how to install an FM 355.
• You will learn step-by-step how to install and remove an FM 355.

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


4.1 Preparing for Installation 4-2
4.2 Installing and Removing the FM 355 4-4

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 4-1
Installing and Removing the FM 355

4.1 Preparing for Installation

Defining the Slots


The FM 355 function module occupies two slots. It can be installed like a signal
module in any of the slots 4 through 11.

Planning the Mechanical Structure


Manual /1/ describes the possibilities open to you for mechanical installation and
how to proceed when configuring. The following paragraphs give only a few
supplementary tips.
1. A maximum of eight signal modules or function modules are permissible per
rack.
2. The maximum number is restricted by the width of the modules or the length of
your DIN rail. The FM 355 requires an installation width of 80 mm.
3. The maximum number is restricted by the total current consumptions of all
modules to the right of the CPU from the 5 V backplane bus supply. The current
consumption of the FM 355 from the 5 V backplane bus supply totals 50 mA.
4. The maximum number is restricted by the memory required by the
CPU software for communication with the FM 355.

Specifying the Installation Position


Horizontal position is preferable for the rack. For vertical position you must observe
the restricted ambient temperatures (max. 40 °C).

Specifying the Starting Address


The starting address of the FM 355 is required for communications between the
CPU and the FM 355. The starting address must be entered in the instance DBs of
the required FBs (refer to Chapters 7 and 11).
The entry is made either with the help of the Statement List/Ladder Editor or from
the user program.
You can determine the starting address of the FM 355 in accordance with the
same rules used to determine the starting address of an analog module.

Controller Module FM 355


4-2 A5E00059344-02
Installing and Removing the FM 355

Fixed Addressing
In the case of fixed addressing, the starting address depends on the slot. Refer to
the tables in manual /1/ for the starting address of an analog module in the
different slots.
You can also calculate this fixed starting address using the following formula:
Address = 256 + (rack no. * 128) + (slot no. - 4) * 16

Free Addressing
In case of free addressing you specify the starting address of the module by using
STEP 7.

Important Safety Regulations


There are important regulations you must observe for integrating an S7-300 with
an FM 355 into a plant or system. These rules and regulations are explained in
manual /1/.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 4-3
Installing and Removing the FM 355

4.2 How to Install and Remove the FM 355

Rules
No special protection measures (ESD guidelines) are required for installing an
FM 355.

Required Tools
You will require a 4.5 mm screwdriver to install and remove the FM 355.

Installation Procedure
The following section decribes how to proceed when mounting the FM 355 on the
DIN rail. You will find further information on installing modules in Manual /1/.
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. The FM 355 is supplied with a bus expansion connector. Plug this into the bus
connector of the module to the left of the FM 355. (The bus connector is located
on the back and you may have to loosen the adjacent module.)
3. Hang the FM 355 onto the rail and swing it down.
4. Tighten the screw on the FM 355 (tightening torque approx. 0.8 to 1.1 Nm).
If further modules are to be installed to the right of the FM 355, first connect the
bus expansion connector of the next module to the right-hand backplane bus
connector of the FM 355.
If the FM 355 is the last module in the rack, do not connect a bus expansion
connector!
5. Label the FM 355 with its slot number. Use the number wheel supplied with the
CPU for this purpose.
Manual /1/ describes the numbering scheme you must use and how to connect
the slot numbers.
6. Install the shield attachment.

Controller Module FM 355


4-4 A5E00059344-02
Installing and Removing the FM 355

Procedure for Removal/Module Replacement


The following section describes how to remove the FM 355. You will find further
information on installing modules in Manual /1/.
1. Switch off the supply voltage L+ at the front connector.
2. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
3. Open the front panels. If necessary, remove the labeling strips.
4. Release the front connectors and pull them out.
5. Loosen the fixing screws on the module.
6. Swing the module out from the DIN rail and unhook it.
7. Install the new module if applicable.

Further Information
Manual /1/ contains further information on installing and removing modules.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 4-5
Installing and Removing the FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


4-6 A5E00059344-02
Wiring the FM 355 5
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter contains information on wiring the FM 355.
• The terminal assignment of the front connector.
• The functions of the connections.
• Information on selecting the cables.
• Which steps have to be carried out when wiring the front connector.
• The state of the module after wiring and after switching on the power supply.

Section Description Page


5.1 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector 5-2
5.2 Wiring Front Connectors 5-9
5.3 Module State after Switching On 5-11

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 5-1
Wiring the FM 355

5.1 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector.

Front Connector of the FM 355 C


The digital inputs, analog inputs and outputs and the power supply of the module
are connected via the two 20-pole front connector of the FM 355 C.
Fig. 5-1 shows the front of the module, a front connector and the inside of the front
doors with the printout of the terminal assignment.

Terminal Terminal
assignment of assignment of
Front view of the module Front connector left-hand front right-hand front
connector connector
FM 355 C
PID Control
S Backup 1
L
Ic+
F 1 2
+
2 3
Ic–
4 +
3
V
4 5 –
5 6 Ic+

6 7
Ic–
7 8 +
V
8 9

1 0

1 1 CH 1

1 2 Ic+
0..500
1 3 CH 2
Ic–
1 4 +
0..500
V CH 3
1 5 –
1 6 Ic+
0..500
1 7 CH 4
Ic–
1 8 +
0..500
V
1 9

2 0 MANA
M
355-0VH00-0AE0

Figure 5-1 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the FM 355 C

Controller Module FM 355


5-2 A5E00059344-02
Wiring the FM 355

Front Connector Assignment of the FM 355 C

Table 5-1 Terminal assignment of the front connector of the FM 355 C

Left-Hand Front Connector Right-Hand Front Connector


Con- Name Function Con- Name Function
Analog Analog
nec- nec-
Input Output
tion tion

1 – – – 1 – L+ Supply voltage 24 V DC
2 IC+ Constant-current line 2 – I1 Digital input
(pos.)
3 IC– Constant-current line 3 – I2 Digital input
1 (neg.)
4 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 4 – I3 Digital input
5 M– Measuring line (neg.) 5 – I4 Digital input
6 IC+ Constant-current line 6 – I5 Digital input
(pos.)
7 IC– Constant-current line 7 – I6 Digital input
2 (neg.)
8 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 8 – I7 Digital input
9 M– Measuring line (neg.) 9 – I8 Digital input
10 – COMP Reference junction 10 – – –
+ input (pos.)
11 – COMP Reference junction 11 Q1 Analog output
– input (neg.)
1
12 IC+ Constant-current line 12 MANA Reference point of the
(pos.) analog loop
13 IC– Constant-current line 13 Q2 Analog output
(neg.)
3
2
14 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 14 MANA Reference point of the
analog loop
15 M– Measuring line (neg.) 15 Q3 Analog output
16 IC+ Constant-current line 16 3 MANA Reference point of the
(pos.) analog loop
17 IC– Constant-current line 17 Q4 Analog output
(neg.)
4
4
18 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 18 MANA Reference point of the
analog loop
19 M– Measuring line (neg.) 19 – – –
20 – MANA Reference point of the 20 – M Grounding of the supply
analog loop voltage 24V DC

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 5-3
Wiring the FM 355

Note
The connections MANA have to be connected with low impedance to the central
grounding (refer to Fig. 10-1). If you supply an external voltage to the sensor, the
grounding of this external voltage also has to be connected to the grounding of the
CPU.

Front Connector of the FM 355 S


The analog inputs, digital inputs and outputs and the power supply of the module
are connected via the two 20-pole front connector of the FM 355 S.
Fig. 5-2 shows the front of the module, a front connector and the inside of the front
doors with the printout of the terminal assignment.

Terminal Terminal
assignment of assignment of
Front view of the module Front left-hand front right-hand front
connector connector connector
FM 355 S
PID Control
S Backup 1
Ic+
L+
F 1 2

2 3
Ic–
4 +
3
V
4 5 –
5 6 Ic+

6 7
Ic–
7 8 +
V
8 9

1 0

1 1
1 2 Ic+

1 3
Ic–
1 4 +
V
1 5 –
1 6 Ic+

1 7
Ic–
1 8 +
V
1 9

2 0 MANA
M
355-1VH00-0AE0

Figure 5-2 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the FM 355 S

Controller Module FM 355


5-4 A5E00059344-02
Wiring the FM 355

Front Connector Assignment of the FM 355 S

Table 5-2 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the FM 355 S


Left-Hand Front Connector Right-Hand Front Connector
Con- Name Function Con- Con- Name Function
nec- Analog nection troller
tion Input Chan-
nel
1 – – – 1 – L+ Supply voltage 24 V DC
2 IC+ Constant-current line 2 – I1 Digital input
(pos.)
3 IC– Constant-current line 3 – I2 Digital input
1 (neg.)
4 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 4 – I3 Digital input
5 M– Measuring line (neg.) 5 – I4 Digital input
6 IC+ Constant-current line 6 – I5 Digital input
(pos.)
7 IC– Constant-current line 7 – I6 Digital input
2 (neg.)
8 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 8 – I7 Digital input
9 M– Measuring line (neg.) 9 – I8 Digital input
10 – COMP Reference junction 10 – – –
+ input (pos.)
11 – COMP Reference junction 11 Q1 Digital output
– input (neg.) For step controllers:
Manipulated signal up
For pulse controller:
Manipulated value A
1
12 IC+ Constant-current line 12 Q2 Digital output
(pos.) For step controllers:
Manipulated signal down
For pulse controllers:
Manipulated value B
13 IC– Constant-current line 13 Q3 Digital output
(neg.) For step controllers:
3 Manipulated signal up
For pulse controller:
Manipulated value A
2
14 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 14 Q4 Digital output
For step controllers:
Manipulated signal down
For pulse controllers:
Manipulated value B

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 5-5
Wiring the FM 355

Table 5-2 Terminal Assignment of the Front Connector of the FM 355 S


Con- Name Function Con- Con- Name Function
nec- Analog nection troller
tion Input Chan-
nel

15 M– Measuring line (neg.) 15 Q5 Digital output


For step controllers:
3 Manipulated signal up
For pulse controller:
Manipulated value A
3
16 IC+ Constant-current line 16 Q6 Digital output
(pos.) For step controllers:
Manipulated signal down
For pulse controllers:
Manipulated value B
17 IC– Constant-current line 17 Q7 Digital output
(neg.) For step controllers:
Manipulated signal up
4 For pulse controllers:
Manipulated value A
4
18 M+ Measuring line (pos.) 18 Q8 Digital output
For step controllers:
Manipulated signal down
For pulse controllers:
Manipulated value B
19 M– Measuring line (neg.) 19 – – –
20 – MANA Reference point of the 20 – M Grounding of the supply
analog loop voltage 24V DC

Controller Module FM 355


5-6 A5E00059344-02
Wiring the FM 355

Note
Connection MANA has to be connected with low impedance to the central
grounding (refer to Fig. 10-1). If you supply an external voltage to the sensor, the
grounding of this external voltage also has to be connected to the grounding of the
CPU.

Supply Voltage L+/M


Connect a direct voltage of 24 V to the connections L+ and M in order to supply
voltage to the module and the digital outputs.

Caution
! Only an extra-low voltage ≤ 60 V DC which is isolated safely from the network may
be used for the 24V DC power supply. Safe isolation can be realized in
accordance with one of the following requirements:
• VDE 0100 Part 410/HD 384-4-41 / IEC 364-4-41 (as a functional extra-low
voltage with safe isolation)
• VDE 0805 / EN 60950 / IEC 950 (as a safety extra-low voltage SELV)
• VDE 0106 Part 101

An integrated diode protects the module against incorrect connection of the power
supply.

Input Filter for Digital Inputs


In order to suppress interferences the digital inputs I1 to I8 have an input filter
(RC elements) with a uniform filtering time of 1.5 ms.

Digital Outputs
In order to trigger control processes directly the FM 355 S disposes of eight digital
outputs, Q1 to Q8.
The digital outputs are supplied via the power supply L+.
The digital outputs are isolated against the bus of the S7-300.
The digital outputs are current-sourcing switches and can carry a load current of
0.1 A. They are protected against overloading and short circuiting.

Note
The direct connection of inductivities (for example, of relays and contactors) is
possible without external circuiting. If SIMATIC output circuits can be switched off
by means of additionally installed contacts (for example, relay contacts) you must
provide additional overvoltage protectors at inductivities (refer to the following
example for overvoltage protection).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 5-7
Wiring the FM 355

Example of Overvoltage Protection


Fig. 5-3 shows an output circuit which requires additional overvoltage protectors.

SIMATIC-S7
control

Contact in the output circuit

Inductivity requires
circuiting (refer to Fig. 5-4)

Figure 5-3 Relay Contact in the Output Circuit

Circuiting of D.C.-Controlled Coils


D.C.-controlled coils are circuited with diodes or Zener diodes.

With With Zener


diode diode
+ +

- -

Figure 5-4 Circuiting of D.C.-Controlled Coils

Circuiting with Diodes/Zener Diodes


The circuiting with diodes/Zener diodes has the following properties:
• Switching overvoltages can be avoided completely.
Zener diodes have a higher circuit interruption voltage.
• High cut-out delay (6-9-fold higher than without a suppression circuit)
Zener diodes switch off faster than diode circuits.

Controller Module FM 355


5-8 A5E00059344-02
Wiring the FM 355

5.2 Wiring Front Connectors

Cables
Some rules have to be observed when selecting the cables:
• The cables for the digital inputs I1 to I8 have to be shielded if they are longer
than 600 m.
• The cables for the analog signals have to be shielded.
• You have to apply the shields of the cables of the analog signals both at the
sensor and directly near the module, for example, over the shielding support
elements.
Fig. 5-5 shows details for connecting the analog signals.

Shielding on Shielding on
shielding support element housing
Front connectors
Con-
nection
4
5
8
9
14
15
18
19
MANA
20

Twisted cables

Figure 5-5 Connection of Analog Signals

Terminal 20 (MANA) of the front connector is to be connected to the grounding of


the CPU with low impedance. If you supply an external voltage to the sensor, the
grounding of this external voltage also has to be connected to the grounding of the
CPU.
• Use flexible cables with cross-sections of 0.25 to 1.5 mm2.
• A core end sleeve is not required. If you do use core end sleeves, only use
models with an insulating collar conforming to DIN 46228 Form A, short
version!

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 5-9
Wiring the FM 355

Note
Analog inputs are to be short-circuited and connected to MANA.

Wiring Steps
Proceed as follows when wiring the front connector:
1. Bring the front connector to the wiring position and open the front door.
2. Strip the cables (length 6 mm).
3. Are you using core end sleeves?
If so: Crimp the core end sleeves to the cables.
4. Insert the enclosed strain relief into the front connector.
5. If the cables lead out downwards, begin the wiring from the bottom - otherwise
from the top. Also realize wiring for unused connections (tightening torque 0.6
to 0.8 Nm).
6. Fasten the strain relief for the cable winding.
7. Slide the front connector to the operating position.
8. Apply the shieldings of the cables flat against the shielding support element or
onto the shielding terminating bar.
9. Assign an identifier of the connections to the labeling shield.
Fig. 5-6 shows the module with the shielded cables and the shielding support
element.

Figure 5-6 Connection of the Shielded Cables to the FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


5-10 A5E00059344-02
Wiring the FM 355

5.3 Module State after First Switching On

Characteristics
The state of the module after the power supply has first been switched on and
when no data have been transferred yet (delivery state) has the following
characteristics:
• Analog inputs: No processing
• Analog outputs (C controllers): 0 mA
• Digital outputs (S controllers): Zero (switched off)
• No controller active
• Diagnostic interrupt disabled

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 5-11
Wiring the FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


5-12 A5E00059344-02
Assigning Parameters to the FM 355 6
What Does this Chapter Describe?
In this chapter you will learn how to install and start the parameter assignment user
interface.

Prerequisites
STEP 7 must have been installed correctly on your programming device or PC

Form of Supply
The software is supplied on a CD-ROM.

Installation
Proceed as follows to install the software:
1. Insert the CD into the CD drive of your programming device/PC.
2. Start the dialog box for installing software under Windows 95/NT by
double-clicking on the “Add/Remove Programs” icon in the Control Panel.
3. Select the CD drive and the SETUP.EXE file in the dialog box and start the
installation procedure.
4. Follow the step-by-step instructions which the installation program gives you.
The installation procedure installs the following items on your
programming device/PC:
• Parameter assignment interface
• Function blocks
• Program examples
• Online help

Program Examples
The program examples are contained in the STEP 7 directory folder in the
”Examples” subdirectory im the project FM_PIDEx.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 6-1
Assigning Parameters to the FM 355

Reading Out the Readme File


Important up-to-date information on the software supplied may be contained in a
README file. You will find this file in the start window of the SIMATIC Manager.

Hardware Configuration
Configuring requires that you have already created a project in which you can save
the parameter assignments. You will find more information on configuring modules
in your Standard Software for S7 and M7, STEP 7 User Manual. The most
important steps are outlined below.
1. Start the SIMATIC Manager and open the configuration table in your project.
2. Select a rack and position it.
3. Open the rack.
4. Select the FM 355 in your module catalog.
5. Drag the FM 355 to the corresponding row in your configuration table.
6. Note the input address of the FM 355 from the configuration table,
for example, 272.
The value you read out will be in decimal format.

Parameter Assignment
You can now start assigning parameters.
Assigning parameters means setting the module parameters.
1. Double-click on the order number for the FM 355 in the configuration table or
select the FM 355 and use the menu command Edit > Object Properties.
Result: The “Properties” dialog box is opened.
2. Click on the “Basic Parameters” tab.
Result: The “Basic Parameters” dialog box is opened.
3. Assign the basic parameters for the FM 355.
4. Click on the “Parameters...” command button.
Result: The parameter assignment interface is opened.
5. Assign parameters to the FM 355, and save the parameters with File > Save
command.
6. Close the parameter assignment interface.
7. Save your project in HWConfig by using Station > Save and Compile.
8. Download the parameter data to the CPU in STOP mode by using the menu
command PLC > Download > Project.
Result: The data are then in the CPU memory and are transferred from there
directly to the FM 355.
9. Carry out a CPU startup.

Controller Module FM 355


6-2 A5E00059344-02
Assigning Parameters to the FM 355

Observe the Following Points during Parameter Assignment


The FM 355 checks parameters for limits only in as far as it is necessary to ensure
the module functionality. This applies, for example, to parameters which are used
for forming addresses and to time-dependent variables (for example, integration
time constant > half sampling time). When the FM 355 recognizes a parameter
assignment error, an entry is made in the DS0 and DS1 of the FM 355 (refer to
Chapter 12) and the red error LED is activated. You can read out parameter
assignment errors on the FM 355 by using the menu PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error of the parameter assignment interface.
Further checks for any limits set or for plausibility (for example, upper limit > lower
limit) are not carried out
In the parameter assignment software you can freely select both the assignment
between inputs and controller channels and between controller channels and
outputs. You should note the following:

Note
The parameter assignment software does not display an error message if you
assign an input or output more than once when assigning controller channels to
the inputs and outputs.

Integrated Help
There is an integrated help function for the parameter assignment software which
helps you in assigning parameters to the FM 355. You can call up the integrated
help in one of the following ways:
• By using the menu command Help > Contents...
• By pressing F1
• By clicking on the “Help” button in the parameter assignment dialog boxes
The integrated help describes the parameter assignment of the module in more
detail than the module.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 6-3
Assigning Parameters to the FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


6-4 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User
Program 7
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter contains all the information required to program the FM 355 in the
S7-300. Six STEP 7 blocks, which allows simple handling of the desired functions,
are provided for integrating the FM 355 into a user program.
This chapter describes the following blocks:
• FB PID_FM for operator control and monitoring via the CPU as well as for
changing the controller parameters online
• FB FUZ_355 for reading and writing the parameters of all the temperature
controllers of the FM 355. The block allows rapid adjustment of the controllers
to changes in the process and parameter assignment of the temperature
controllers after a module replacement without renewed identification.
• FB FORCE355 for simulating (forcing) the analog and digital inputs
(to support the setup).
• FB READ_355 for reading out the digital and analog input values
(to support the setup).
• An FB CH_DIAG for displaying further channel-specific parameters
(to support the setup)
• The FB PID_PAR for changing further parameters online.
• The FB CJ_T_PAR for changing the configured reference junction temperature
online.

Section Description Page


7.1 The Function Block PID_FM 7-2
7.2 The Function Block FUZ_355 7-15
7.3 The Function Block FORCE355 7-17
7.4 The Function Block READ_355 7-19
7.5 The Function Block CH_DIAG 7-21
7.6 The Function Block PID_PAR 7-25
7.7 The Function Block CJ_T_PAR 7-30

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-1
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.1 The Function Block PID_FM

The FM 355 is interconnected to the user program by means of the FB PID_FM.


This FB allows you to change operating parameters during operation. You can, for
example, specify a setpoint value and the manipulated value or switch to an
external manipulated-value specification.
The data required for the FM PID_FM are saved in an instance DB on the CPU.
The FB PID_FM reads data from the FM 355 program-controlled and writes data
to the FM 355 program-controlled.
The individual parameters are describe in the online help and in Chapter 11.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an Instance DB for each controller channel and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with the
associated function block PID_FM under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR for each instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel (1, 2, 3 or 4)
in the CHANNEL parameter for each instance DB.
4. Save the instance DBs.

Call
The FB PID_FM must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access the
same FM 355.
The FB PID_FM is normally called in the watchdog interrupt OB 35. It requires an
initializing run which started by setting the parameter COM_RST = TRUE in the
startup of the CPU. It is possible to call the FB in the start-up OB, but it is not
necessary. After the initialization run the FB PID_FM sets the parameter
COM_RST to FALSE.

Controller Module FM 355


7-2 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.1.1 Operating by Means of the FB PID_FM

The operating parameters (for example, setpoint value, manual manipulated value)
of the FM 355 are transferred cyclically from the FB PID_FM to the FM 355.
Operating parameters are all the in/out parameters, which lie in the instance DB of
the function block between the parameters op_par and cont_par.
In order for the data transmission to be possible without a high run time in the
CPU, transmission is normally (when LOAD_OP = FALSE) carried out via direct
I/O accesses. The data are multiplexed since only four bytes per channel are
available in the I/O address area of the module. It can therefore take up to three
cycles of the CPU or of the FM 355 until the operating values have been
transferred to the FM 355 and become effective there - the respectively longer
cycle is decisive.
If you want the operating values to be transferred immediately (within one cycle of
the CPU or of the FM 355) to the FM 355, you can then set the parameter
LOAD_OP to TRUE. The transmission is then carried out via the SFC WR_REC,
the FB then requires more run time (refer to the Technical Specifications Function
Blocks in Section A.2). After the data transmission has been carried out
successfully the LOAD_OP parameter is reset to FALSE by the FM PID_FM. If the
FM 355 is used in distributed remote I/Os, it can take some call cycles.

7.1.2 Monitoring by Means of the FB PID_FM

The FB PID_FM reads process values (for example, actual value, manipulated
value) cyclically from the FM 355. Process values are all the output parameters of
the function block of the parameter out_par.
The FB PID_FM also reads the process values via direct I/O accesses, if
READ_VAR = FALSE. This transmission does not require much run time, however
the following functional restrictions result.
If the parameter READ_VAR = TRUE is set, then the process values are read from
the FM 355 by means of the SFC RD_REC. However, this requires more run time
(refer to Technical Specifications). After the data transmission has been carried out
successfully, the READ_VAR parameter is reset to FALSE by the FM PID_FM. If
the FM 355 is used in distributed remote I/Os, it can take some call cycles.

Function at READ_VAR = TRUE


If one of the following parameters ”Operating setpoint value SP_OP”, “Operating
manipulated variable LMN_OP” and the corresponding switches “SP_OP_ON” and
“LMNOP_ON” was changed by operation via the OP, the FB PID_FM takes over
these values from the FM 355 after the CPU has been started up.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-3
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Functional Restrictions for READ_VAR = FALSE


• The parameters SP (setpoint value from the FM), ER (error signal), DISV
(disturbance variable), LMN_A and LMN_B are not read from the FM (refer to
Chapter 11, Assignment of the DBs).
• The data are multiplexed. Actual value, manipulated value and the binary
displays are updated at every fourth call of the block.
• If the setpoint value and the manual manipulated variable were operated via
MPI, these operating values are not read out of the FM by the FB during the
CPU start-up.

Note
Multiplexing of the data to be transferred is controlled by the FB PID_FM in the
case of access to the FM 355 via direct I/O accesses. This multiplex controlling
does not function if two instances of the FB PID_FM access the same channel
number of a module. This results in incorrect parameters in the FM 355 (for
example, setpoint value and manual manipulated variable) and incorrect display of
the FB PID_FM to its output parameters.

Error Displays
The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59. RET_VAL can be evaluated if the parameters READ_PAR and
LOAD_PAR are not reset. The values of RET_VALU are described in the
Reference Manual /2/.
When the FB PID_FM is called, an I/O access error (I/O AAE) can arise, if the
FM 355 is not plugged or if there is no power supply. In this case the CPU changes
over to STOP, if no OB 122 is loaded in the CPU.

Controller Module FM 355


7-4 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.1.3 Changing Controller Parameters via the FB PID_FM

Controller parameters (for example, controller gain, integration action factor) are all
the I/O parameters which lie in the instance DB of the function block after the
parameter cont_par. Controller parameters are initially configured via the
parameter assignment interface and are transferred via the system data to the
FM 355 (also refer to Section 3.6, “Working Mechanisms and Data Retention in the
FM 355”).
Changing the controller parameters via the FB PID_FM makes sense if you want
to change them during operation depending on the process states. To do so,
proceed as follows:
1. Set the parameter COM_RST of the FB PID_FM to TRUE in the CPU startup.
The FB then reads all the controller parameters from the FM 355 and stores
them in its instance DB. The instance DB of the FB PID_FM has now been
compared to the parameters of the parameter assignment interface (system
data). After the parameters have been read succesfully, the FB PID_FM sets
the parameter COM_RST to FALSE. If the FM 355 is used in distributed remote
I/Os, it can take some call cycles.
2. If COM_RST = FALSE, you can then change individual controller parameters in
the instance DB of the FB PID_FM in the user program.
To do so call the FB PID_FM with LOAD_PAR = TRUE. The FB PID_FM then
transfers all the controller parameters from the instance DB to the FM. After the
parameters have been transmitted successfully the FB PID_FM resets the
parameter LOAD_PAR. If the FM 355 is used in distributed remote I/Os, it can
take some call cycles.

Note
Please note that the parameters in the FM 355 are overwritten by the values from
the system data whenever the CPU is started up (transition from STOP to RUN).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-5
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.1.4 Changing the Controller Parameters via The OP

Proceed as follows in order to change controller parameters of the FB PID_FM by


operation at the OP:
1. Write the parameters to be modified from the OP into an auxiliary DB (1).
2. Do not transfer the parameters which are to be changed from the auxiliary DB
to the instance DB of the FB PID_FM (3) until after the initializing run started by
COM_RST = TRUE (2).
3. Transfer the parameters to FM 355 by setting LOAD_PAR (4).
Storage of the parameters in an auxiliary DB is necessary because the
FB PID_FM reads those parameters from the FM 355 which the CPU transferred
beforehand from the system data to the FM after the CPU has been started up
with COM_RST = TRUE .

CPU OP
(1)

Auxiliary
DB

(3)
After initialization with
COM_RST = TRUE
FM 355

Instance DB FB (4)
of the FB PID_FM LOAD_PAR = TRUE
PID_FM
COM_RST = TRUE
(2)

System
data Downloading of the
system data,
Startup,
STOP → RUN of CPU

Figure 7-1 Changing Controller Parameters via OP

If COM_RST = TRUE is set, the parameter CHANNEL is then also checked. If an


invalid channel number was assigned at the CHANNEL parameter, the output
QMOD_F and QCH_F is set, COM_RST remains set and no further action of the
FB is carried out.
If the check did not find any errors and the parameters were read succesfully from
the FM 355, the parameter COM_RST is reset by the FB PID_FM.

Controller Module FM 355


7-6 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Note
If the FB is called during the first call with COM_RST = FALSE and an invalid
channel number is assigned at the parameters MOD_ADDR or CHANNEL, the FB
accesses an incorrect I/O address without any further check.

7.1.5 Saving the Parameters in the EEPROM

During program-controlled reconfiguration (LOAD_PAR, LOAD_OP) of the FM 355


by the FB PID_FM its run time increases. The new parameters become effective
immediately and are saved additionally in an EEPROM. After each saving process
of parameters in the EEPROM renewed saving is delayed by 30 minutes since the
lifetime of the EEPROM is limited by the number of write processes. After a power
supply has returned saving of new parameters in the EEPROM is possible
immediately. Whether reconfiguration of the FM 355 by the FB PID_FM is carried
out smoothly depends of the parameter selection.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-7
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.1.6 Relationship between FB Parameters and Parameter


Assignment Interface

The following figures show the relationship between the FB PID_FM and the
parameter assignment interface of the controller module.
In the case of three-component controllers and ratio/blending controllers the
parameters act at the same point as for fixed setpoint or cascade controllers. This
also applies to the parameters which exist in continuous controllers, in controllers
with pulse outputs as well as in step controllers. This generally means that the
same command buttons also contain the same parameters. In order to ensure a
good overview we therefore do not show all the structure images and all the
parameters are not shown in all the figures.
The parameters of the FB PID_FM are, however, contained in all the figures - with
the exception of the parameters MOD_ADDR, CHANNEL, QMOD_F, QPARA_F,
QCH_F, QLMNR_ON, RET_VALU, COM_RST, LOAD_PAR, READ_VAR,
LOAD_OP.
Figures 7-2 to 7-7 show at which points in the module the parameters of the
FB PID_FM act.

SP_HLM
SP_OP
SP_LLM

Effective
SP_RE
Switch Ramp setpoint
Limit
safety
Setpoint setpoint Error
signal

SP_OP_ON H_ALM
MONERSEL H_WRN
L_WRN
Alarm L_ALM
HYS

Actual value A Effective


actual value

D input
D_EL_SEL

Disturbance variable

Figure 7-2 Error Signal Formation in a Fixed Setpoint or Cascade Controller

Controller Module FM 355


7-8 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

FUZID_ON
Effective setpoint

Effective actual Temperature


value controller Effective
manipulated value

GAIN TM_LAG
TI P_SEL
DEADB_W TD PFDB_SEL

Error signal
Dead band

D input
Manipulated value
correction

Disturbance variable

Figure 7-3 Block Diagram of the Control Algorithm

LMN_RE
LMN_REON LMNOP_ON
External
manipulated SAFE_ON LMN_HLM
value LMN_OP
LMN_SAFE LMN_LLM
Manipulated
Manipulated
value A
Switch value
Effective
manipulated external LMNTRKON
value manipulated
value Switch Limit Split-range
safety
manipulated
Switch value
Manipulated
correction
value B

Follow-up input

Manipulated value correction

Figure 7-4 Continuous Controller Output

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-9
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch PULSE_TM


manipulated external BREAK_TM
value manipulated Manipulated
value value

Switch Switch Limit Split-range/


correction safety pulse shaper
manipulated
value
Follow-up input

Manipulated value correction

Figure 7-5 Step Controller Output (Pulse Controller Mode)

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external MTR_TM
value manipulated Manipulated PULSE_TM
value value BREAK_TM

Switch Switch Limit


correction safety Pulse
manipulated shaper
value
Follow-up input

Manipulated value correction

Position feedback input

Figure 7-6 Step Controller Output (Step Controller with Position Feedback Mode)

Controller Module FM 355


7-10 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

LMNDN_OP
LMNUP_OP

LMNSOPON
LMNRS_ON
MTR_TM Actuating
PULSE_TM signal
BREAK_TM
High
LMNRSVAL
External
manipulated value
Low

Effective Switch Switch Pulse


manipulated external safety shaper
value manipulated manipulated
value value LMNRHSRE
LMNRLSRE

Figure 7-7 Step Controller Output (Step Controller without Position Feedback Mode)

Figures 7-8 to 7-13 show at which points in the module the output parameters of
the FB PID_FM are created.

QUPRLM QSPHLM
SP_OP
QDNRLM QSPLLM

Effective
SP_RE SP
Switch Ramp setpoint
Limit ER
safety
Setpoint setpoint Error
signal
PV

QH_ALM
QSPOPON QH_WRN
QL_WRN
Alarm QL_ALM

Actual value A Effective


actual value

D input

DISV

Disturbance variable

Figure 7-8 Error Signal Formation in a Fixed Setpoint or Cascade Controller

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-11
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

QSPLEPV QFUZZY
Effective setpoint

Effective actual Temperature


value controller Effective
manipulated value

PID

Error signal
Dead band

D input
Manipulated value
correction

Disturbance variable

Figure 7-9 Block Diagram of the Control Algorithm

External QLMNOPON
QLMNRE
manipulated
value QLMN_HLM
LMN
LMN_OP QSPR
QLMNSAFE QLMN_LLM
Manipulated
Switch value LMN_A
Effective
external
manipulated QLMNTRK
manipulated Manipulated
value
value Switch Limit Split-range value A
safety
manipulated LMN_B
Switch value
correction Manipulated
value B

Follow-up input

Manipulated value correction

Figure 7-10 Continuous Controller Output

Controller Module FM 355


7-12 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external
value manipulated Manipulated
value value QLMNUP
QLMNDN

Switch Switch Limit Split-range/


correction safety pulse shaper
manipulated
value
Follow-up input

Manipulated value correction

Figure 7-11 Step Controller Output (Pulse Controller Mode)

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external
manipulated Manipulated QLMNRHS
value
value value QLMNRLS

Switch Switch Limit


correction safety Pulse
manipulated shaper
value
Follow-up input QLMNDN

QLMNUP

Manipulated value correction

LMN_A

Position feedback input

Figure 7-12 Step Controller Output (Step Controller with Position Feedback Mode)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-13
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

QLMNRHS
QLMNRLS
External
QLMNUP
manipulated value
QLMNDN
Effective Switch Switch Pulse
manipulated external safety shaper
value manipulated manipulated
value value

Figure 7-13 Step Controller Output (Step Controller without Position Feedback Mode)

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB PID_FM is shown in Section 11.1.

Controller Module FM 355


7-14 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.2 The Function Block FUZ_355

The FB FUZ_355 is used for the temperature controller of the FM 355 (fuzzy
controller). With this FB you can read and write the parameters of all the
temperature controllers of the FM 355. This function is suitable for the following
applications:
• Transfer of the controller parameters determined by identification to the FM 355
after a module replacement
• Adapting the FM 355 to various processes

Note
You may not change the parameters determined through identification by the
FM 355 since they have been optimized for the process.

The FB FUZ_355 does not require an initializing run.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an instance DB and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DB as a data block with the associated function block
FB FUZ_355 under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR at the instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Save the instance DB.

Call
The FB FUZ_355 must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access
the same FM 355.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-15
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

The FB FUZ_355 is Used as Follows:


After you have carried out an identification of the temperature controllers and the
controllers control satisfactorily, call the FB FUZ_355 and set the parameter
READ_PAR to TRUE.
The FB then reads the parameters of all four temperature controllers of the
FM 355 and stores them in the instance DB. After the temperature controller
parameters have been read out successfully, the FB FUZ_355 sets the parameter
READ_PAR to FALSE. If the FM 355 is used in distributed remote I/Os, it can take
some call cycles. After you have set READ_PAR you should therefore call the
FB conditionally as long as READ_PAR = TRUE.
In the CPU startup you should set the parameter LOAD_PAR of the FB FUZ_355
and then call the block conditionally in the cyclic program as long as
LOAD_PAR = TRUE. When the parameter LOAD_PAR = TRUE is set, the FB
writes the parameters of all four temperature controllers of the FM 355 from the
instance DB to the FM 355. After the data transmission has been carried out
successfully the LOAD_PAR parameter is set to FALSE by the FM PID_FM. If the
FM 355 is used in distributed remote I/Os, it can take some call cycles.
When the temperature controller parameters are being read, a parameter
assignment error display of the temperature controller parameters in the
PARAFFUZ parameter is displayed as follows:
High byte of PARAFFUZ not equal to zero means that a parameter error is
present. The low byte contains the byte offset of the incorrect parameter, related to
the beginning of the static variable. Thus, for example, PARAFFUZ = W#16#0104
means that the second parameter is incorrect.
The error display can only be shown if you manipulate the temperature controller
parameters in the instance DB and write them to the FM 355. You can also read
out these parameter assignment errors by using the menu PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error of the parameter assignment interface.
The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59. RET_VALU can be evaluated if the parameters READ_PAR and
LOAD_PAR are not reset. The values of RET_VALU are described in the
Reference Manual /2/.

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB FUZ_355 is shown in Section 11.2.

Controller Module FM 355


7-16 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.3 The Function Block FORCE355

The FB FORCE355 is used to simulate (force) the analog and digital input values
to support the setup.
The FB FORCE does not require an initializing run. It is normally called cyclically.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an instance DB and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DB as a data block with the associated function block
FB FORCE355 under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR at the instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Save the instance DB.

Call
The FB FORCE355 must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access
the same FM 355.

Simulation of the Analog Values


The simulation of the analog values for channels one to four is activated by using
the switch S_AION[ i ] or S_PVON[ i ], whereby 1 ≤ i ≤ 4. Figure 7-14 shows at
which point the simulated analog value is effective.
The simulation values for channels one to four are specified by means of the
parameter PV_SIM[ i ].
You can let the simulation values become effective at two points:
• S_AION[ i ] = TRUE (1 ≤ i ≤ 4)
The value PV_SIM[ i ] is used instead of the value of the analog input i of the
module.
• S_PVON[ i ] = TRUE (1 ≤ i ≤ 4)
The value PV_SIM[ i ] is used instead of the preprocessed value of the analog
input i of the module.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-17
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Simulation of the Digital Values


The simulation of the values for the digital inputs one to eight is activated by using
the switch S_DION[ i ], whereby 1 ≤ i ≤ 8.
The simulation values are specified via the parameter DI_SIM[ i ].
• S_DION[ i ] = TRUE (1 ≤ i ≤ 8)
The value DI_SIM[ i ] is used instead of the value of the digital input i of the
module.

Note
The LEDs I1 to I8 always show the state of the corresponding digital input, also
during simulation.

Simulation value 1≤i≤4


PV_SIM [ i ]
Activate Activate
simulation: simulation:
S_AION [ i ] S_PVON [ i ]

Sensor type

A
D
Preprocessed
Filter Root Polyline Normalizing analog value
extraction
Reference Activate simulation:
input S_DION [ i ]
Simulation
configured value 1
DI_SIM [ i ]
Digital value
Digital input 0

Figure 7-14 Action of the Simulation Values

When restarting the FM 355 after a power off, the simulation switches on the
FM 355 are repositioned at FALSE.
The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59. The values of RET_VALU are described in the Reference
Manual /2/.

Note
Switching on and specification of the simulation values (force function) is not
carried out via the parameter assignment interface. The corresponding switches
and connecting lines are therefore drawn as dashed lines.

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB FORCE355 is shown in Section 11.3.

Controller Module FM 355


7-18 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.4 The Function Block READ_355

The FB READ_355 is used to read out the digital and analog input values in order
to support the setup.
The FB READ_355 does not require an initializing run. It is normally called
cyclically.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an instance DB and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DB as a data block with the associated function block
FB READ_355 under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR at the instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Save the instance DB.

Call
The FB READ_FM must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access
the same FM 355.

Displayed Values
The following values are displayed:
• The reference junction temperature measured at the reference junction in
degrees C or in degrees F (depending on the temperature unit configured) is
shown at the parameter CJ_TEMP. If no sensor type ”Thermoelement” was
configured or if the configured reference junction temperature was selected at
all the analog inputs, 0.0 is displayed at the parameter CJ_TEMP.
• The actual state of the digital inputs 1 to 8 is displayed at the parameters
STAT_DI[1] to STAT_DI[8], also when these are simulated.
• The value of the analog inputs one to four is displayed in the unit mA or mV at
the parameters DIAG[1].PV_PER to DIAG[4].PV_PER. If the simulation of the
analog input value was activated via the FB FORCE355, the simulated value is
displayed.
• The value of the preprocessed analog inputs one to four is displayed in the
engineering unit at the parameters DIAG[1].PV_PHY to DIAG[4].PV_PHY. If the
simulation of the preprocessed physical analog input value was activated via
the FB FORCE355, the simulated value is displayed.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-19
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

DIAG [ i ].PV_PER 1≤i≤4 DIAG [ i ].PV_PHY

Sensor type

A
D
Preprocessed
Filter Root Polyline Normalizing analog value
extraction

Reference CJ_TEMP
input

Cold
configured junction
temperature

Figure 7-15 Displayed input values

The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59.
The values of RET_VALU are described in the Reference Manual /2/.

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB READ_355 is shown in Section 11.4.

Controller Module FM 355


7-20 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.5 The Function Block CH_DIAG

The FB CH_DIAG reads further channel-specific parameters from the module (to
support the setup).
The FB CH_DIAG does not require an initializing run. It is normally called cyclically.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an instance DB for each controller channel and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with the
associated function block FB CH_DIAG under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR for each instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel (1, 2, 3 or 4)
in the CHANNEL parameter for each instance DB.
4. Save the instance DBs.

Call
The FB CH_DIAG must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access
the same FM 355.

Displayed Values
The following values are displayed:
• The parameter SP_R is only relevant for ratio or blending controllers. It displays
the ratio factor specified via the setpoint input (refer to Figure 7-16).
• The parameter PV_R is only relevant for ratio controllers. It shows the effective
process variable ratio and is calculated as follows: PV_R = (PV – offset) / PV_D
(refer to Figure 7-16). Offset is the parameter which can be configured by the
”Multiply” command button.
• DIF_I is the input value of the derivative component of the PID controller, not
only at ratio or blending controllers (refer to Figure 7-16).
• TRACKPER is the tracking input value of the controller output (refer to
Figure 7-18).
• IDSTATUS is is the status display of the temperature controller if the controller
was configured (refer to Figure 7-17). The display IDSTATUS is described on
Page 3-53 of Section 3.8.
• LMN_P is the proportional component of the PID controller (refer to
Figure 7-17)
• LMN_I is the integral component of the PID controller (refer to Figure 7-17)
• LMN_D is the derivative component of the PID controller (refer to Figure 7-17)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-21
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

SP_R SP

Multiply

Setpoint Effective
Switch Ramp Limit/ setpoint
safety normalize
value

Actual value D Error


signal
PV_D

Alarm
Actual value A Effective
DIF_I actual
value
PV

D input

Disturbance variable

Figure 7-16 Displayed Diagnostic Values of the Error Signal

Controller Module FM 355


7-22 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

IDSTATUS

Effective setpoint

Effective actual Temperature


value controller Effective
manipulated
LMN_P value
LMN_I
LMN_D
PID

Error signal
Dead band

D input
Manipulated value
correction

Disturbance variable

Figure 7-17 Displayed Values of the Control Algorithm

External
manipulated
value

Effective Switch
manipulated external
manipulated Manipulated
value
value value

Manipulated
Switch Switch Limit Split-range value A
correction safety
manipulated value

TRACKPER Manipulated
value B
Follow-up input

Manipulated value correction

Figure 7-18 Displayed Values of the Continuous Controller or Step Controller

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-23
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59.
The values of RET_VALU are described in the Reference Manual /2/.

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB CH_DIAG is shown in Section 11.5.

Controller Module FM 355


7-24 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.6 The Function Block PID_PAR

The FB PID_PAR is used to change further parameters online, which cannot be


specified via the FB PID_FM.
The FB PID_PAR requires an initializing run. For this purpose it must be called
once here in the startup by using the parameter COM_RST = TRUE. Othewise
calling the FB causes a parameter assignment error on the module. You can also
read out these parameter assignment errors by using the menu PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error of the parameter assignment interface.
In order to save run time the FB PID_PAR should not be called cyclically but only
when parameters are to be changed. COM_RST must then be FALSE.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an Instance DB for each controller channel and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with the
associated function block FB PID_PAR under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR for each instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel (1, 2, 3 or 4)
in the CHANNEL parameter for each instance DB.
4. Save the instance DBs.

Call
The FB PID_PAR must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access
the same FM 355.
The FB PID_PAR can be used to change one each of the REAL parameters and
one of the INT parameters listed in Table 7-1 for each call.
The assignment of the specified value to the parameter is carried out via the index
numbers of Table 7-1 which you can specify in the parameter INDEX_R or
INDEX_I in the instance DB of the FB PID_PAR.
If the input COM_RST = TRUE, the FB reads the parameters from the system
data and saves them in static variables. The parameters to be changed are
overwritten there and then the complete record is transferred to the FM. Since the
FB has its own data retention for the parameters in its static variables, further
parameters can also be changed. For this purpose you must call the same
instance DB several times consecutively with COM_RST = FALSE and with
different index numbers.
The parameter COM_RST is an input parameter which cannot be reset by the
FB PID_PAR.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-25
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59.
The values of RET_VALU are described in the Reference Manual /2/.
If the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os, it can take some call cycles until the
parameters are transferred to the FM 355. The parameter BUSY has the value
TRUE as long as the transfer has not been completed yet. You should therefore
call the FB PID_PAR repeatedly until BUSY = FALSE when parameters change.

Note
Please note that the parameters which you have changed by means of the
FB PID_PAR are overwritten with the parameters from the system data whenever
the CPU is started up.

Example
You want to change the ramp-up time of the ramp for the reference variable as well
as use different analog input values as the process variable depending on the
process state during operation.
• Call the FB PID_PAR with COM_RST = TRUE in the CPU startup.
• In order to configure the ramp-up time of the ramp for the reference variable to
10.0, call the FB PID_PAR during operation with INDEX_R = 30,
VALUE_R = 10.0 and INDEX_I = 0.
• In order to configure the process variable = analog input value 4 of the module
to the FB PID_PAR during operation with INDEX_R = 0, INDEX_I = 50 and
VALUE_I = 4.

Table 7-1 List of REAL and INT Parameters which Can Be Changed with the FB PID_PAR

Data Type Description Index Nummer


- No parameter selected 0
REAL Filter time constant for analog input 1
REAL Measuring end (100%) 2
REAL Measuring start (0%) 3
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 1 input end 4
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 2 input end 5
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 3 input end 6
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 4 input end 7
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 5 input end 8
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 6 input end 9
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 7 input end 10
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 8 input end 11
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 9 input end 12
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 10 input end 13
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 11 input end 14

Controller Module FM 355


7-26 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Table 7-1 List of REAL and INT Parameters which Can Be Changed with the FB PID_PAR, continued

Data Type Description Index Nummer


REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 12 input end 15
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 13 input end 16
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 1 output end 17
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 2 output end 18
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 3 output end 19
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 4 output end 20
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 5 output end 21
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 6 output end 22
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 7 output end 23
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 8 output end 24
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 9 output end 25
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 10 output end 26
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 11 output end 27
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 12 output end 28
REAL Polyline, Interpolation value 13 output end 29
REAL Ramp-up time of the ram for reference variable 30
REAL Safety reference variable or safety reference variable response 31
REAL Offset for setpoint value logic (ratio/blending controller) 32
REAL Factor for process variable B (three-component controller) 33
REAL Factor for process variable C (three-component controller) 34
REAL Offset for process variable logic (three-component controller) 35
REAL Factor for disturbance variable logic 36
REAL Operating point 37
REAL Aggressiveness at fuzzy controller 38
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: Start of range for input signal A 39
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: End of range for input signal A 40
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: Start of range for output signal A 41
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: End of range for output signal A 42
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: Start of range for input signal B 43
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: End of range for input signal B 44
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: Start of range for output signal B 45
REAL Vertices for slit-range function: End of range for output signal B 46
REAL Minimum pulse time 47
REAL Minimum pause time 48
INT Selection of the reference variable SP or SP_RE for the controller 49
0: Setpoint value SP_RE from function block
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
17 to 20: Manipulated variable from controllers 1 to 4
INT Selection of the main process variable, process variable A for the 50
controller
0: Process variable A = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
INT Selection of the auxilary process variable, process variable B for the 51
controller
0: Process variable B = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-27
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Table 7-1 List of REAL and INT Parameters which Can Be Changed with the FB PID_PAR, continued

Data Type Description Index Nummer


INT Selection of the auxilary process variable, process variable C for the 52
controller
0: Process variable C = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
INT Selection of the auxilary process variable, process variable D for the 53
controller
0: Process variable D = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
17 to 20: Manipulated variable from controllers 1 to 4
INT Selection of the disturbance variable DISV for the controller 54
0: Disturbance variable = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
INT Selection of the status tracking TRACK_PER for the controller 55
0: Status tracking = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
INT Selection of the status tracking LMNR_PER for the controller 56
0: Status tracking = 0.0
1 to 4: Analog input value 1 to 4
INT Selection of the signal for changing over to safety value for the 57
manipulated value of the controller
0: Only selection via SAFE_ON parameter of the FB PID_FM
1 to 8: Selection via SAFE_ON parameter of the FB PID_FM ORed
with digital input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the signal for changing over to tracking function of the 58
manipulated value of the controller
0: Only selection via LMNTRKON parameter of the FB PID_FM
1 to 8: Selection via LMNTRKON parameter of the FB PID_FM
ORed with digital input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the signal for changing over the manipulated value of the 59
controller to LMN_RE
0: Only selection via LMN_REON parameter of the FB PID_FM
1 to 8: Selection via LMN_REON parameter of the FB PID_FM
ORed with digital input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the upper stop signal of the position feedback 60
0: Only selection via LMNRHSRE parameter of the FB PID_FM
1 to 8: Selection via LMNRHSRE parameter of the FB PID_FM
ORed with digital input 1 to 8
INT Selection of the lower stop signal of the position feedback 61
0: Only selection via LMNRLSRE parameter of the FB PID_FM
1 to 8: Selection via LMNRLSRE parameter of the FB PID_FM
ORed with digital input 1 to 8

Controller Module FM 355


7-28 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Take into Account

Note
The FB PID_PAR uses the SFC 54 RD_DPARM. You can therefore only use
FB PID_PAR in the CPUs listed in Table 7-2:

Table 7-2 List of CPUs in which the FB PID_PAR Can Be Used

CPU Order No.


CPU 312IFM 6ES7 312-5AC01-0AB0
CPU 313 6ES7 313-1AD02-0AB0
CPU 314 6ES7 314-1AE03-0AB0
CPU 314IFM 6ES7 314-5AE02-0AB0
CPU 315 6ES7 315-1AF02-0AB0
CPU 315DP 6ES7 315-2AF02-0AB0
CPU 316 6ES7 316-1AG00-0AB0
CPU 614 6ES7 614-1AH02-0AB3
CPU 412-1 6ES7 412-1XF02-0AB0
CPU 412-2 6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0
CPU 413-1 6ES7 413-1XG02-0AB0
CPU 413-2 6ES7 413-2XG02-0AB0
CPU 414-1 6ES7 414-1XG02-0AB0
CPU 414-2 6ES7 414-2XG02-0AB0
CPU 414-2 6ES7 414-2XJ01-0AB0
CPU 414-3 6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0
CPU 414-3H 6ES7 414-3HJ00-0AB0
CPU 416-1 6ES7 416-1XJ02-0AB0
CPU 416-2 6ES7 416-2XK01-0AB0
CPU 416-2 6ES7 416-2XL01-0AB0
CPU 416-3 6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0
CPU 417-4 6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0
CPU 417-4H 6ES7 417-4HL00-0AB0
All future CPUs

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB PID_PAR is shown in Section 11.6.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-29
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

7.7 The Function Block CJ_T_PAR

The FB CJ_T_PAR is used to change the configured reference junction


temperature online. This is necessary if a temperature control system with several
FM 355s with thermoelement inputs is to be operated without having to connect a
Pt 100 to each FM 355.
If, for example, the reference junction temperature is to be measured with an
FM 355 in an extruder control system with more than four heating zones, then it
can be read out via the FB READ_355 at the parameter CJ_TEMP and configured
via the FB CJ_T_PAR at the other FM 355s .
The FB CJ_T_PAR requires an initializing run. For this purpose it must be called
once here in the startup by using the parameter COM_RST = TRUE.
The FB CJ_T_PAR is normally called cyclically. COM_RST should be FALSE in
order to reduce the run time.
The parameter COM_RST is an input parameter which cannot be reset by the
FB CJ_T_PAR.

Creating and Supplying the Instance DB


Before you can use the user program to program the module you must first create
an instance DB and supply important data to it.
1. Create the instance DB as a data block with the associated function block
FB CJ_T_PAR under STEP 7.
2. Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR at the instance DB.
The module address of the FM 355 is specified while configuring the hardware.
Accept the value ”Address input” from HW Config.
3. Enter the channel number of the corresponding controller channel (1, 2, 3 or 4)
in the CHANNEL parameter for the instance DB.
4. Save the instance DB.
The reference junction temperature can be specified via the parameter CJ_T.
The output parameter RET_VALU contains the return value RET_VAL of the
SFCs 58 and 59. The values of RET_VALU are described in the Reference
Manual /2/.
If the FM 355 is used in distributed I/Os, it can take some call cycles until the
parameter is transferred to the FM 355. The parameter BUSY has the value TRUE
as long as the transfer has not been completed yet. You should therefore call the
FB CJ_T_PAR repeatedly until BUSY = FALSE when parameters change.

Call
The FB PID_PAR must be called in the same OB as all other FBs which access
the same FM 355.

Controller Module FM 355


7-30 A5E00059344-02
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Take into Account

Note
The FB CJ_T_PAR uses the SFC 54 RD_DPARM. You can therefore only use
FB CJ_T_PAR in the CPUs listed in Table 7-2:

Instance Data Block Allocation


The allocation of the instance DB of the FB CJ_T_PAR is shown in Section 11.7.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 7-31
Integrating the FM 355 into The User Program

Controller Module FM 355


7-32 A5E00059344-02
Starting Up the FM 355 8
Overview
This chapter shows you how to start up the FM 355 using only a few steps.

HW Installation and Wiring


In order to achieve a clearer structure the process of starting up has been
subdivided into several smaller steps. In this first section you install the FM 355 in
your S7-300 and wire up the external I/O elements.

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Determining the slot
Slots 4 through 11 in rack 0 
Slots 4 through 11 in rack 1 
Slots 4 through 11 in rack 2 
Slots 4 through 11 in rack 3 
2 Installing the FM 355 (refer to Chapter 4)
• Switch the CPU to STOP mode. 
• Loosen the neighboring module and plug in the bus connector. 
• Hang the FM 355 onto the rail and screw it tight. 
• Label the module with its slot number. 
• Install the shield attachment. 
3 Wiring the FM 355 (refer to Chapter 5)
• Analog inputs (left front connector) 
• Digital inputs (right front connector) 
• Analog outputs (C controller only, right front connector) 
• Digital outputs (S controller only, right front connector) 
• Wire up the supply voltage
- 24 V supply voltage L+: right front connector pin 1 
- Ground supply voltage M: right front connector pin 20 
• Wire up the reference potential of the analog measurement circuits
- MANA: left front connector pin 20 
4 Front connectors
The front connectors must be clicked into place. 

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 8-1
Starting Up the FM 355

Step Options/Procedure 
5 Shielding
Check the shielding of the individual cables. 
6 Switching on the voltage supply
Switch on the 24 V supply for the FM 355. 

Creating a New Project


If you want to insert the FM 355 in an existing project, skip this section and move
to the next section.
If you have not yet created a project, create a new project under STEP 7 so that
you can assign parameters with the parameter assignment software:

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Create a new project under STEP 7. 
2 Configure a new rack. 
3 Enter your hardware structure in the rack using the hardware

configuration application.
4 Select the FM 355 from the module catalog and drag it to the selected

slot.
5 Note the module address which is now displayed.
This value will be required later to prepare the instance DB.
____
6 Now call the parameter assignment software for the FM 355 by

double-clicking on the order number of the FM 355.

Now go to the section labeled Assigning Parameters.

Inserting FM 355 into an Existing Project


If you want to insert the FM 355 into a SIMATIC 300 station of an existing project,
proceed as follows:

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Open the SIMATIC 300 station for your existing project. 
2 Select the FM 355 from the module catalog and drag it to the selected

slot.
3 Note the module address which is now displayed.
This value will be required later to prepare the instance DB.
____
4 Now call the parameter assignment software for the FM 355 by

double-clicking on the order number of the FM 355.

Controller Module FM 355


8-2 A5E00059344-02
Starting Up the FM 355

Parameter Assignment
Assign parameters to the module.

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Fill out the dialog boxes for the basic parameters:
• For interrupt selection, determine whether the FM 355 should trigger 
interrupts.
2 Click on the button Parameters... 
3 Fill out the dialog boxes. 
4 Save the parameter assignments by using the menu command

File > Save.

Saving Parameter Configuration Data and Transferring them to the FM 355


When you have finished assigning parameters, you have to save the data and
prepare the plant for operation.

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Close the parameter assignment interface. 
2 Save the project by using File > Save and Compile. 
3 Switch the CPU to STOP mode. 
4 Download the data to the CPU with Download...

The data are transferred directly to the CPU and the FM 355.

Creating an Instance DB
You must create an instance DB for each controller channel in order to use the
functions of the module.

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Create the instance DBs for the controller channels as data blocks with

the associated function block FB31 PID_FM.
2 Enter the module address in the parameter MOD_ADDR for each
instance DB.

This is the address you noted when you were configuring your hardware
under STEP 7.
3 In every instance DB, enter the channel number in the CHANNEL

parameter.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 8-3
Starting Up the FM 355

Starting Up the FM 355


You can now optimize and debug your process.

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Switch the CPU to RUN mode. 
2 Open the parameter assignment interface and measure the motor
actuating time: 
Debug > Measure Motor Actuating Time
3 Call the controller optimization:
Debug > Controller Optimization 
4 Execute the steps for controller optimization. 
5 Monitor and modify the control loop with the loop monitor function:

Debug > Loop Monitor
6 Monitor the control loop with the curve recorder function:

Debug > Curve Recorder

Saving a Project
Once you have completed all the tests successfully and the parameters for the
FM 355 have been optimized, you must save the data again.

Step Options/Procedure 
1 Save all the data in the parameter assignment with

File > Save.
2 Close the parameter assignment interface. 
3 Save the project with File > Save. 
4 Download the data to the CPU in STOP mode with Download... 
5 Switch the CPU to RUN mode. 

Controller Module FM 355


8-4 A5E00059344-02
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs
and Outputs 9
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter describes the properties of the digital and analog inputs and outputs.

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


9.1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (S Controllers) 9-2
9.2 Properties of the Analog Inputs 9-4
9.3 Properties of the Analog Outputs (C Controllers) 9-7

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 9-1
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

9.1 Properties of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (S Controllers)

Properties
The digital inputs and outputs of the FM 355 S have the following properties:
• 8 inputs
• 8 outputs
• Output current 0.1 A
• Rated load voltage: 24 VDC
• Suitable for switches, 2/3/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs), solenoid valves,
DC contactors and indicator lights
The assignment of the digital inputs and outputs to the controller channels is
described in Section 3.1.

Note
When connecting the 24 V supply voltage to the system via a mechanical contact,
as a result of the switching, the outputs of the FM have a “1” signal for
approximately 50 µs. You should remember this if you use the FM in conjunction
with fast counters!

Controller Module FM 355


9-2 A5E00059344-02
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Wiring and Block Diagram


Figure 9-1 shows the wiring diagram and the block diagram of the digital inputs and
outputs of the FM 355 S.

Backup Inputs L+
L+
1
2
3
Backplane
4
bus
5
6
7 Minternal
8
M

Outputs L+

Backplane
bus

Minternal

M M

Wiring Block diagram


diagram
Channel number

Status LEDs - green

Figure 9-1 Wiring Diagram and Block Diagram of the Digital Inputs and Outputs (S Controller)

The LEDs of the digital outputs are not controlled and do not have any meaning.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 9-3
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

9.2 Properties of the Analog Inputs

Properties
The analog inputs of the FM 355 have the following properties:
• 4 inputs
• Measured-value resolution
– 12 bits
– 14 bits
• Measurement type, selectable for each analog input:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistance
– Temperature
• Selectable measurement range for each analog input
• Diagnostics that can have parameters set
• Diagnostic interrupt that can have parameters set
• Limit-value monitoring
• Limit-value alarm that can have parameters set
The assignment of the analog inputs to the controller channels is described in
Section 3.1.

Current Measurement
When measuring current an external measuring shunt of 50 Ω must be connected
to the analog inputs between M+ and M-.

Reference Input COMP+, COMP-


If you connect a Pt 100 to measure the reference junction temperature at the
analog inputs COMP+ and COMP-, you must supply this Pt 100 with current from
the input CH3 (terminals IC3+ and IC3-). You can then no longer connect a Pt 100
to the input CH3. The input CH3 is, however, still available for measuring current or
voltage or for connecting a thermocouple (refer to Figure 9-2).

Resolution
The reset time results from the selected resolution of the measured value. The
preciser the resolution of the measured value, the longer the reset time for the
analog input channel (refer to the Technical Data of the analog inputs).

Controller Module FM 355


9-4 A5E00059344-02
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Wiring Diagram
Figure 9-2 shows the wiring diagram of the analog inputs of the FM 355.

Voltage measurement Resistance


Error LED - red measurement
Thermocouples
Current measurement
FM 355 S
PID Control
SF
Ic+ IC1+
IC1-
Ic-
+ M1+ M1+ CH 1
CH 1
V M1- M1-
-
Ic+ IC2+
IC2-
Ic- CH 2
+ M2+ CH 2 M2+
V M2- M2-
-
COMP+ COMP-

COMP- COMP-
Ic+
1) IC3+
IC3-
Ic-
+ M3+ M3+ CH 3
CH 3
V M3- M3-
-
Ic+ IC4+
IC4-
Ic- CH 4
+ M4+ M4+
CH 4
V M4- M4-
-
MANA MANA MANA
355-1VH00-0AE0

Wiring 1) At compensation of the


diagram reference junction
temperature with Pt 100

Figure 9-2 Wiring Diagram of the Analog Inputs

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 9-5
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Block Diagram
Figure 9-3 shows the block diagram of the analog inputs.The input resistances are
dependent on the measurement range set (refer to the Technical Specifications).

Channel activation
Current source
CH 1

CH 2

ADC
• Processing in
• +
the FM 355
External
compensation



Configured
CH 3 compensation

CH 4

L+
Internal
24 V VDC
supply
M

Figure 9-3 Block Diagram of the Analog Inputs

Controller Module FM 355


9-6 A5E00059344-02
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

9.3 Properties of the Analog Outputs (C Controllers)

Properties
The analog outputs of the FM 355 C have the following properties:
• 4 outputs
• The outputs can be selected for each channel as
– Voltage output
– Current output
• 12 bit resolution
• Diagnostics that can have parameters set
The assignment of the analog outputs to the controller channels is described in
Section 3.1.

Note
When switching the supply voltage (L+) on and off, incorrect intermediate values
may occur at the output for approximately 10 ms.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 9-7
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Wiring Diagram
Figure 9-4 shows the wiring diagram for the analog outputs of the FM 355 C.

Current output Voltage


output
L+ L+
Backup 24 V 24 V
L I1 I1
1
+ I2 I2
2
I3 I3
3
I4 I4
4
I5 I5
5
I6 I6
6
I7 I7
7
I8 I8
8

CH 1 QI1 QV1
MANA CH 1 MANA CH 1
CH 2 QI2 QV2
MANA CH 2 MANA CH 2
CH 3 QI3 QV3
MANA CH 3 MANA CH 3
CH 4 QI4 QV4
MANA CH 4 MANA CH 4

M M
M M
M
Wiring
diagram

Figure 9-4 Wiring Diagram of the Analog Inputs (C Controller)

Controller Module FM 355


9-8 A5E00059344-02
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Block Diagram
Figure 9-5 shows the block diagram for the analog outputs of the FM 355 C.

DAC
Q1
CH 1
MANA

Q2
Processing in CH 2
MANA
the FM 355
Q3
CH 3
MANA

Q4
CH 4
MANA

L+
Internal 24 V DC
supply M

Block diagram

MANA all channels are connected


internally

Figure 9-5 Block Diagram for the Analog Outputs (C Controller)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 9-9
Properties of Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Controller Module FM 355


9-10 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and
Loads/Actuators 10
What Does this Chapter Describe?
This chapter describes
• Basic information on connecting measuring sensors
• A description of thermoelements
– Design and method of operation of thermoelements
– Compensation of the reference junction temperature
• The description of how thermoelements are connected to analog inputs
• The description of how other measuring sensors are connected to analog inputs
– Connection of voltage sensors
– Connection of current sensors
– Connection of resistance sensors
• The description of how loads/actuators are connected to analog outputs

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


10.1 Connecting Measuring Sensors to Analog Inputs 10-2
10.2 Use of Thermoelements 10-5
10.3 Connecting Voltage and Current Sensors and Resistance 10-10
Thermometers
10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 10-13
10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs 10-15

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-1
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

10.1 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs

Overview
Depending on the measuring type used you can connect various measuring
sensors to the analog inputs of the FM 355:
• Voltage sensors
• Current sensors as 4-wire measuring transducers and 2-wire measuring
transducers
• Resistors
This chapter describes how you connect the sensors and what you have to
observe when connecting the sensors.

Cables for Analog Signals


You should use screened and twisted-pair cables for the analog signals. This
reduces the disturbing influences.You should ground the screen of the analog
cables at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the cable
ends, a potential compensating current could flow across the screen possibly
causing the analog signals to be disturbed. In this case, you should only ground
the screen at one cable end.

Reference Point MANA


You must create a connection between the reference point of the analog loop
MANA and the M-connection of the CPU. For this purpose connect the terminal
MANA to the M-connection of the CPU. A potential difference between MANA and
the M-connection of the CPU would lead to a possible invalidation of the analog
signal.

Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in Figures 10-1 and 10-2 have the following meaning:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M -: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Electrical bonding
L +: Voltage supply connection 24 V DC
UCM: Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the
measuring circuit MANA

Controller Module FM 355


10-2 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs


No potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may arise between the
measuring leads M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring
circuit MANA. In order for the permitted value not to be exceeded, you have to carry
out different measures depending on the potential connection of the sensor
(isolated, non-isolated). These measures are explained in this chapter.

Isolated Measuring Sensors


The isolated sensors are not connected to the local potential to ground. They can
be operated potential-free. Local conditions or disturbances can cause potential
differences UCM (static or dynamic) between the measuring leads M- of the input
channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA.

Note
You must connect M- to MANA in order for the permitted value (UCM) not to be
exceeded.
You must also connect M- to MANA when connecting resistance-type sensors. This
also applies for inputs which are configured correspondingly but which are not
used.

Figure 10-1 shows the connection in principle of isolated sensors to an FM 355.

L+ FM 355
M

M+
Isolated M-
measuring ADC Logic
M+
sensor
M-

MANA
CPU

M
L+
M

Main ground bus

Figure 10-1 Block Diagram of the Connection of Isolated Measuring Sensors

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-3
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Non-Isolated Measuring Sensors


The non-isolated sensors are connected to the local potential to ground. You have
to connect MANA to the potential to ground. Local conditions or disturbances can
cause potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) to arise between the locally
distributed measuring points.
Equipotential bonding lines must be provided between the measuring points if the
permitted value for UCM may be exceeded.
The CPU must be operated ground-coupled. This means that you must provide a
jumper between and M at the CPU.
Figure 10-2 shows the connection in principle of non-isolated sensors to an
FM 355.

L+ FM 355
M

M+
Non-isolated M-
measuring Logic
M+ ADC
sensor
M-

UCM MANA
CPU

M
Equipotential L+
bonding line M

Main ground bus

Figure 10-2 Block Diagram of the Connection of Non-Isolated Measuring Sensors

Controller Module FM 355


10-4 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

10.2 Use of Thermoelements

Overview
This chapter describes the design of thermoelements and the points to be
observed when connecting thermoelements.

Design of Thermoelements
A thermoelement consists of
• The thermocouple (detecting elements) and
• The respective built-in and connection parts.
The thermocouple consists of two wires which are made of different metals or
alloys and whose ends are soldered or welded to each other. The various types of
thermoelements are named after the different material compositions, for example,
B, J, K. The measuring principle of all the thermoelements is the same,
irrespective of the thermoelement type.

Measuring point
Thermocouple with plus and minus
thermal legs
Connecting point
Equalizing line

Reference junction

Lead wire

Trimming resistor

Detection point of the thermal e.m.f.

°C

Figure 10-3 Design of Thermoelements

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-5
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Operating Principle of Thermoelements


When a measuring junction is subject to a different temperature than the free ends
of the thermocouple, a voltage, called the thermal e.m.f., arises between the free
ends.
The height of the thermal e.m.f. depends on the difference between the
temperature of the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends as well
as on the material combination of the thermocouple. Since a thermocouple always
detects a temperature difference the free ends of a reference junction have to be
kept to a known temperature in order to determine the temperature at the
measuring junction.
If this is not possible, the reference junction temperature has to be detected and
equalized via the additional input with a Pt 1000.

Extension to a Reference Junction


The thermocouples can be extended from their connecting point by means of
equalizing lines to a point with a temperature which remains constant as far as
possible (reference junction).
The equalizing lines are made of the same material as the wires of the
thermoelement. The lead wires are made of copper. Ensure that the polarity of the
equalizing lines is not reversed since large measuring errors will otherwise arise.

Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature


The influence of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction can be
compensated by measuring the reference junction temperature outside the
module.

Measuring the Reference Junction Temperature


The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermoelement (for
example, the terminal box) can be equalized by measuring the reference junction
temperature with a Pt 100.
If the actual reference temperature differs from the comparison temperature, the
temperature-dependent resistance changes. A positive or negative compensation
voltage arises which is added to the thermal e.m.f.
Please note:
• The power supply of channel 3 must be used to supply the constant current for
the Pt 100.
• Channel 3 can then not be used for Pt 100 measurement.

Controller Module FM 355


10-6 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Use of Thermoelements
The following points must be observed when connecting thermoelements:
Depending on where the reference junction is required, either configured or
external compensation can be used.
In case of configured compensation a configurable reference junction temperature
of the module is used for comparison.
In the case of external compensation the temperature of the reference junction of
the thermoelements is taken into consideration by means of a Pt 100.
This Pt 100 is connected to connections 10 and 11 at the left-hand front connector
of the module, whereby the Pt 100 must be applied to the reference junction of the
thermoelements. Its power supply must be taken from channel 3 (connections 12
and 13 of the left-hand front connector).
The following restrictions apply:
• External compensation with connection of the Pt 100 to connections 10 and 11
of the module can only be carried out for one thermoelement type. This means
that all the channels which use external compensation must use the same type.

Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in Figures 10-4 and 10-5 have the following meaning:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M -: Measuring lead (negative)
COMP+: Compensation connection (positive)
COMP-: Compensation connection (negative)
M: Electrical bonding
L +: Voltage supply connection 24 V DC

Possibilities of Connecting Thermoelements


Figures 10-4 and 10-5 show the various possibilities of connecting thermoelements
to external and configured compensation.
In addition to the information below the information contained in Chapter 10.1 on
connecting sensors to analog inputs applies. In the figures below the required
connecting lines between the M-connection of the CPU, M-, MANA and the
potential to ground which result from the potential connection of the FM 355 to the
sensor (isolated, non-isolated) are not shown. This means that you must continue
to observe and implement the information given in Section 10.1.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-7
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Thermoelements With External Compensation of the Reference Junction


If all the thermoelements which are connected to the inputs of the FM 355 have the
same reference junction, carry out compensation as shown in Figure 10-4. The
thermoelements which use a reference junction must be of the same type.

Lead wire
(made of Cu) L+ FM 355
M

M+
M- Processing
Thermoelements M+ in the
Logic
M- FM 355

ADC
Equalizing line IC+
(same material as COMP+
thermoelement)

COMP-
IC-

Reference
junction

Figure 10-4 Block Diagram for Connecting Thermoelements with External Compensation

The grounding of thermoelements is shown in Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2.

Controller Module FM 355


10-8 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Thermoelements with Configured Compensation of the Reference Junction


The configured temperature compensation can be used when thermoelements are
connected directly or via equalizing lines to the inputs of the module.

Lead wire
(made of Cu) L+ FM 355
M

M+
M- Processing
Thermocouples M+ in the
Logic
M- FM 355

ADC
IC+
Equalizing line
(same material as COMP+
thermoelement)

COMP-
IC-

Reference MANA
junction
Compensation can be specified by the configuration interface

Figure 10-5 Block Diagram for Connecting Thermoelements with Configured Compensation

The grounding of thermoelements is shown in Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-9
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

10.3 Connecting Voltage and Current Sensors and Resistance


Thermometers

Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in Figures 10-6 to 10-9 have the following meaning:
IC +: Constant-current line (positive)
IC -: Constant-current line (negative)
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M -: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Electrical bonding
L +: Voltage supply connection 24 V DC
In addition to the information below the information contained in Section 10.1 on
connecting sensors to analog inputs applies. In the figures below the required
connecting lines between the M-connection of the CPU, M-, MANA and the
potential to ground which result from the potential connection of the FM 355 to the
sensor (isolated, non-isolated) are not shown. This means that you must continue
to observe and implement the information given in Section 10.1.

Connection of Voltage Sensors


Figure 10-6 shows the connection of voltage sensors to an FM 355.

L+ FM 355
M

+ M+
U M-
-
+ M+ ADC Logic Processing in
U M- the FM 355
-

MANA

Figure 10-6 Connection of Voltage Sensors

Controller Module FM 355


10-10 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Connection of Current Sensors as 4-Wire Measuring Transducers


4-wire measuring transducers have a separate operating voltage.
Figure 10-7 shows the connection of current sensors as 4-wire measuring
transducers to an FM 355.

L+ FM 355
Sensor, M
for example
manometer
M+
measuring +
transducer ADC Processing in
P * Logic
4-wire

the FM 355
- M-

MANA
L+ M
* External resistor 50 Ω
M

Figure 10-7 Connecting 4-Wire Measuring Transducers

Connection of Current Sensors as 2-Wire Measuring Transducers


The 2-wire measuring transducer converts the supplied measured quantities into
current.
The operating voltage must be supplied to the 2-wire measuring transducer
inherently short-circuit-proof.Provide for a fuse as shown in Figure 10-8.
2-wire measuring transducers must be isolated sensors.
Figure 10-8 shows the connection of current sensors as 2-wire measuring
transducers.

Sensor, L+ FM 355
for example M
manometer
Fuse
M+
+
transducer
measuring

P ADC Processing in
* Logic
the FM 355
2-wire

- M-

MANA

M * External resistor 50 Ω

Figure 10-8 Connecting 2-Wire Measuring Transducers

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-11
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Connection of Resistance Thermometers (For Example, Pt 100) and Resistors


The resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a 4-wire connection. A
constant current is supplied to the resistance thermometers/resistors via the
connections IC + and IC - . The voltage arising at the resistance
thermometer/resistor is measured at the connection M + and M -. This means that
a high degree of precision of the measuring results is attained at a 4-wire
connection.
Figure 10-9 shows the connection of resistance thermometers to an FM 355.

L+ FM 355
M

M+
M-
ADC Logic Processing in
IC+ the FM 355
IC IC-

MANA

Figure 10-9 Connection of Resistance Sensors

In the case of a 2- or 3-wire connection you must apply corresponding jumpers to


the module between M + and IC + or M - and IC - . However, you must then accept
losses in the precision of the measuring results.

Controller Module FM 355


10-12 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

10.4 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs

Overview
Current or voltage can be supplied to loads/actuators by means of the FM 355 C.

Cables for Analog Signals


You should use screened and twisted-pair cables for the analog signals. This
reduces the disturbing influences. You should ground the screen of the analog
cables at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the cable
ends, a potential compensating current could flow across the screen possibly
causing the analog signals to be disturbed. In this case you should only ground the
screen at one cable end.

Reference Point MANA


You must create a connection between the reference point of the analog loop
MANA and the M-connection of the CPU in order to operate the FM 355 C. For this
purpose connect the terminal MANA to the M-connection of the CPU. A potential
difference between MANA and the M-connection of the CPU would lead to a
possible invalidation of the analog signal

Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in Figure 10-10 have the following meaning:
Q: Analog output (current or voltage, depending on the configuration)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
RL: Load/Actuator
L +: Voltage supply connection 24 V DC
M: Electrical bonding

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-13
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Connecting Loads to an Analog Output


Loads at an analog output have to be connected to Q and the reference point of
the analog circuit MANA.
Loads can only be connected to an analog output with a 2-wire connection.
Figure 10-10 shows the connection in principle of loads to an analog output of an
FM 355 C.

FM 355 L+
M

Q
Processing in Logic DAC
the FM 355
RL

MANA

CPU

M
L+
M

Main ground bus

Figure 10-10 Connecting a Load to an FM 355 C

Controller Module FM 355


10-14 A5E00059344-02
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

10.5 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Digital Outputs

Overview
Voltage can be supplied to loads/actuators by means of the FM 355 S.

Abbreviations Used
The abbreviations used in Figure 10-11 have the following meaning:
Q: Digital output
RL: Load/Actuator
L +: Voltage supply connection 24 V DC
M: Electrical bonding

Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Digital Output


Figure 10-11 shows the connection in principle of loads/actuators to a digital
output of an FM 355 S.

FM 355 L+

Q
Processing in Logic
the FM 355
RL

Figure 10-11 Connection of Loads/Actuators to an FM 355 S

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 10-15
Connecting Measuring Sensors and Loads/Actuators

Controller Module FM 355


10-16 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks 11
Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


11.1 Instance DB of the FB PID_FM 11-2
11.2 Instance DB of the FB FUZ_355 11-23
11.3 Instance DB of the FORCE355 11-26
11.4 Instance DB of the FB READ_355 11-28
11.5 Instance DB of the FB CH_DIAG 11-30
11.6 Instance DB of the FB PID_PAR 11-32
11.7 Instance DB of the FB CJ_T_PAR 11-34
11.8 Assignment of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via 11-36
the OP

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-1
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.1 Instance DB of the FB PID_FM

You require the FB PID_FM in order to communicate with the FM 355 while you
are in the user program. You must also create an instance data block (DB) that is
assigned to the function block for each controller channel used.

Note
After you have created an instance DB all the in/out parameters are set to FALSE.
In order to transfer the parameters from the FM 355 to the instance DB you have
to carry out an initialization run in which the in/out parameter COM_RST = TRUE
is set.

The following tables list the parameters of this instance DB:


• Input parameters (Table 11-1)
• Output parameters (Table 11-2 on Page 11-3)
• In/out parameters (Table 11-3 on Page 11-12)

Table 11-1 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains -
module address the module address
that resulted from
the configuration set
under STEP 7.
2.0 CHANNEL INT Channel 1 to 4 1 At the input “channel -
number number” you can set
the number of the
controller channel to
which the instance
DB is to refer.
4.0 PHASE INT Phase of the Is not 0 The parameter -
PID self tuner configured PHASE can be
interconnected to
the output
parameter PHASE
of a PID self tuner
(program for
self-tuning of
controller
parameters). The
phase state of the
PID self tuner can
then be displayed in
clear text in the loop
display.This
parameter is without
meaning for the OP.

Controller Module FM 355


11-2 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
6.0 RET_VALU INT Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).
8.0 out_par WORD Beginning of W#16#3130 W#16#3 The parameter -
output 130 out_par may not be
parameters changed by the
user. It identifies
the beginning of the
output parameters
which are read from
the module when
READ_VAR =
TRUE is set.
10.0 SP REAL Setpoint Technical 0.0 The effective -
range of setpoint is output at
values the “Setpoint”
(physical output.
variable)
14.0 PV REAL Process Technical 0.0 The effective actual -
variable range of value is output at
values the “Process
(physical variable” output .
variable)
18.0 ER REAL Error signal Technical 0.0 The effective error -
range of signal is output at
values the “Error signal”
(physical output.
variable)
22.0 DISV REAL Disturbance -100.0...100.0 0.0 The effective -
variable (%) disturbance
variable is output at
the “Disturbance
variable” output.
26.0 LMN REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 The effective -
value (%) manipulated value
is output at the
“Manipulated value”
output. At a step
controller without
analog position
feedback the
unlimited
P- + D-component
is output at the
parameter LMN.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-3
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
30.0 LMN_A REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 At the output -
value A of split (%) “Manipulated value
range function / A of split-range
position function / position
feedback feedback” the
manipulated value
A of the split-range
function for a
continuous
controller and the
position feedback
for a step controller
with analog position
feedback are
displayed.
The output LMN_A
can only be used
for approximate
display of a
corresponding
simulated
manipulated
variable. The
starting
value LMNRSVAL
of the simulated
position feedback
must be configured
correspondingly
and becomes
effective when
LMNRS_ON is set.
34.0 LMN_B REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 At the output -
value B of split (%) “Manipulated
range function value B of
split-range function”
the manipulated
value B of the
split-range function
is displayed for a
continuous
controller.
38.0 QH_ALM BOOL High limit alarm FALSE The actual value or -
reached process variable is
monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit H_ALM is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “High limit
alarm reached”.

Controller Module FM 355


11-4 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
38.1 QH_WRN BOOL High limit FALSE The actual value or -
warning process variable is
reached monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit H_WRN is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “High limit
warning reached”.
38.2 QL_WRN BOOL Low limit FALSE The actual value or -
warning process variable is
reached monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit L_WRN is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “Low limit
warning reached”.
38.3 QL_ALM BOOL Low limit alarm FALSE The actual value or -
reached process variable is
monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit L_ALM is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “Low limit
alarm reached”.
38.4 QLMN_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated value is always
value reached limited to an upper
and a lower limit.
The output “High
limit of manipulated
value reached”
indicates that the
upper limit has
been exceeded.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
38.5 QLMN_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated value is always
value reached limited to an upper
and a lower limit.
The output “Low
limit of manipulated
value reached”
indicates that the
lower limit has been
undershot.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-5
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
38.6 QPARA_F BOOL Parameter FALSE The module checks -
assignment parameters for
error validity. A
parameter
assignment error is
indicated at the
output “Parameter
assignment error”.
You can also read
out these
parameter
assignment errors
by using the menu
PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error
of the parameter
assignment
interface.

38.7 QCH_F BOOL Channel error FALSE The output -


“Channel error” is
set if the controller
channel cannot
supply any valid
results. “Channel
error” (e.g. wire
break) is also set if
QPARA_F = 1 or
QMOD_F = 1. If
QCH_F=TRUE, the
exact error
information can be
read out in the
diagnostics data
record DS1 of the
module (refer to
Chapter 12).

39.0 QUPRLM BOOL Limit of positive FALSE The setpoint is -


setpoint limited in positive
inclination and negative
reached inclination. If the
output “Limit of
positive setpoint
inclination reached”
is set, the positive
setpoint inclination
is limited.
39.1 QDNRLM BOOL Limit of negative FALSE The setpoint is -
setpoint limited in positive
inclination and negative
reached inclination. If the
output “Limit of
negative setpoint
inclination reached”
is set, the negative
setpoint inclination
is limited.

Controller Module FM 355


11-6 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
39.2 QSP_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The setpoint is -
setpoint always limited to an
reached upper and a lower
limit. The output
“High limit of
setpoint reached”
indicates that the
upper limit has
been exceeded.
39.3 QSP_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The setpoint is -
setpoint always limited to an
reached upper and a lower
limit. The output
“Low limit of
setpoint reached”
indicates that the
lower limit has been
undershot.
39.4 QLMNUP BOOL Manipulated FALSE This is the output -
signal up ”Manipulated signal
up”.
(For step
controllers or pulse
controllers only)
39.5 QLMNDN BOOL Manipulated FALSE This is the output -
signal down ”Manipulated signal
down”.
(For step
controllers or pulse
controllers only)
39.6 QID BOOL Identification FALSE QID = TRUE -
running shows that an
identification is
running (not that it
is switched on).
After the end of
identification the
identification result
can be read out via
the parameter
IDSTATUS of the
FB CH_DIAG (refer
to Section 3.8,
Page 3-53 and
Section 7.5,
Page 7-21).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-7
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
40.0 QSPOPON BOOL Setpoint FALSE The output -
operation on “Setpoint operation
on” indicates
whether the
setpoint is being
operated via the
configuration tool. If
the bit is set, the
value SP_OP is
used as the
setpoint.
40.1 QLMNSAFE BOOL Safety FALSE If the output “Safety -
operation operation” is set,
the safety
manipulated value
is output as the
manipulated value.
40.2 QLMNOPON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The output -
value operation “Manipulated value
on operation on”
indicates whether
the manipulated
value is being
operated via the
configuration tool. If
the bit is set, the
value LMN_OP is
used as the
manipulated value.
40.3 QLMNTRK BOOL Follow-up FALSE The output -
operation “follow-up
operation” indicates
whether the
manipulated value
is matched via an
analog input.
40.4 QLMN_RE BOOL Manual = 1 FALSE The output -
Automatic = 0 “Manual = 1;
Automatic = 0”
indicates whether
the manipulated
value is set to the
external
manipulated value
LMN_RE (manual =
1) or not.

Controller Module FM 355


11-8 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
40.5 QLMNR_HS BOOL High limit signal FALSE The output “High -
of repeated limit signal of
manipulated position feedback”
value indicates whether
the control valve is
at its upper limit.
QLMNR_HS =
TRUE means: the
control valve is at
the upper end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
40.6 QLMNR_LS BOOL Low limit signal FALSE The output “Low -
of repeated limit signal of
manipulated position feedback”
value indicates whether
the control valve is
at its lower limit.
QLMNR_LS =
TRUE means: the
control valve is at
the lower end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
40.7 QLMNR_ON BOOL Repeated FALSE The output -
manipulated “Position feedback
value on on” indicates the
set mode as either
“Step controller with
position feedback”
or “Step controller
without position
feedback”.
41.0 QFUZZY BOOL PID FALSE If the output -
algorithm = 0 parameter
Fuzzy = 1 QFUZZY =1, the
controller operates
with the fuzzy
algorithm.
41.1 QSPLEPV BOOL Fuzzy display: FALSE The output “Fuzzy -
Setpoint < display: Setpoint <
process actual value” is set
variable when the fuzzy
controller is
switched on if the
setpoint is smaller
than the effective
process variable.
41.2 QSPR BOOL Split range FALSE If the output -
operation “Split-range
operation” is set,
the continuous
controller operates
in split-range mode.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-9
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
41.4 QMAN_FC BOOL Manual mode or FALSE The controller is a -
anti-reset- master controller
windup by which is tracked by
follower manual operation of
controller a secondary
controller to its
process variable or
whose integral
component is
halted because the
setpoint value or
manipulated
variable of the
secondary
controller is in the
limitation.

41.7 QPARABUB BOOL Internal value FALSE This parameter is -


set by the FM when
operating
parameters are
changed via the
OP. If READ_VAR
= TRUE and if this
display is set by the
FM, the FB
PID_FM reads the
parameters
SP_OP_ON,
LMNOP_ON,
SP_OP and
LMN_OP out of the
FM and saves them
in the instance DB.
The FB thus takes
over the operating
state of the FM.
After the reading
process the
parameter is set to
FALSE.

Controller Module FM 355


11-10 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-2 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM, continued

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
42.0 QMOD_F BOOL Module error FALSE The function block -
checks that a data
record is read and
written correctly. If
an error is
detected, the output
“Module error” is
set. The error
cause can be: AN
incorrect module
address at the
parameter
MOD_ADDR, an
incorrect channel
number at the
parameter
CHANNEL or a
defective module.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-11
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
44.0 COM_RST BOOL Read control FALSE If the parameter -
parameters COM_RST =
from TRUE, the FB
FM 355/455 PID_FM carries out
an initialization run.
In the process the
controller
parameters (all the
parameters after
cont_par) are read
from the FM and
saved in the
instance DB. In
addition the
parameters
MOD_ADDR and
CHANNEL are
checked for their
validity. After the
initialization run the
parameter is set to
FALSE.

44.1 LOAD_OP BOOL Load operator FALSE If the in/out -


parameter to parameter “Load
FM 355/455 operator
parameters to
FM 355/455” is set,
the operator
parameters are
downloaded to the
module and the
in/out parameter
reset.
44.2 READ_VAR BOOL read variables FALSE If the in/out -
from parameter “Read
FM 355/455 variables from
FM 355/455” is set,
the output
parameters are
read from the
module and the
in/out parameter is
reset.
44.3 LOAD_PAR BOOL Load control FALSE If the in/out -
parameter to parameter “Load
FM 355/455 control parameters
to FM 355/455” is
set, the control
parameters are
downloaded to the
module and the
in/out parameter
reset.

Controller Module FM 355


11-12 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
46.0 op_par WORD Beginning of W#16#3130 W#16#3 The parameter -
operation 130 op_par may not be
parameters changed by the
user. It identifies
the beginning of the
operating
parameters which
are transferred to
the module when
LOAD_OP = TRUE
is set. The end of
the operating
parameters is
identified by
cont_par.

48.0 SP_RE REAL External Technical 0.0 An external setpoint -


setpoint range of is connected to the
values controller at the
(physical input “External
variable) setpoint”.

52.0 LMN_RE REAL External -100.0...100.0 0.0 An external -


manipulated (%) manipulated value
value is interconnected to
the controller at the
input “External
manipulated value”.
56.0 SP_OP_ON BOOL Setpoint FALSE The configuration -
operation on tool has access to
the in/out
1) parameter “Setpoint
operation on”. If the
bit is set, the value
SP_OP is used as
the setpoint.
56.1 SAFE_ON BOOL Safety position FALSE If the input “safety -
on position on” is set,
a safety value is
used as the
manipulated value.
56.2 LMNOP_ON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The configuration -
value operation tool has access to
on the in/out
1) parameter
“Manipulated value
operation on”. If the
bit is set, the value
LMN_OP is used
as the manipulated
value.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-13
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
56.3 LMNTRKON BOOL Track (LMN FALSE If the input “Track -
from analog (LMN from analog
input) input)” is set, the
manipulated value
is tracked to an
analog input (AI).
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
56.4 LMN_REON BOOL External FALSE If the input -
manipulated “External
value on manipulated value
on” is set, the
external
manipulated value
LMN_RE is used
as the manipulated
value.
56.5 LMNRHSRE BOOL High limit signal FALSE The signal “Control -
of repeated valve at upper end
manipulated stop” is
value interconnected at
the input “High limit
signal of position
feedback”.
LMNRHSRE =
TRUE means: The
control valve is at
the upper end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
56.6 LMNRLSRE BOOL Low limit signal FALSE The signal “Control -
of repeated valve at lower end
manipulated stop” is connected
value at the input “Low
limit signal of
position feedback”.
LMNRLSRE =
TRUE means: The
control valve is at
the lower end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
56.7 LMNSOPON BOOL Manipulated FALSE If the bit at the input -
signal operation “Manipulated value
on signal operation on”
1) is set, the signals
LMNUP_OP and
LMNDN_OP are
used as
manipulated value
signals.
(For step
controllers only)

Controller Module FM 355


11-14 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
57.0 LMNUP_OP BOOL Manipulated FALSE If LMNSOPON is -
signal up set, the value at the
operation input “Manipulated
1) value signal up
operation” is used
as the manipulated
value signal.
(For step
controllers only)
57.1 LMNDN_OP BOOL Manipulated FALSE If LMNSOPON is -
signal down set, the value at the
operation input “Manipulated
1) value signal down
operation” is used
as the manipulated
value signal.
(For step
controllers only)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-15
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
57.3 LMNRS_ON BOOL Simulation of FALSE If there is no -
the repeated position feedback,
manipulated this can be
value on simulated. The
function is switched
on at the input
“Simulation of the
position feedback
on”. The
configuration tool
(controller
optimization) has
access to this
parameter since at
least one simulated
manipulated value
is required for
optimization if a
step controller was
configured without
position feedback.
The simulated
value is displayed
at parameter
LMN_A. When the
simulation is
activated the value
of the parameter
LMNRSVAL is set
as the starting
value.
CAUTION: The
simulation deviates
increasingly from
the real position
feedback as time
passes.
(For step
controllers without
analog position
feedback only)
57.4 FUZID_ON BOOL Fuzzy FALSE Identification of the -
identification on fuzzy algorithm is
switched on at the
input “Fuzzy
identification on”.
58.0 SP_OP REAL Setpoint Technical 0.0 The configuration -
operation range of tool (controller
values optimization) has
1) access to the in/out
(physical
variable) parameter “Setpoint
operation”. If the bit
SP_OP_ON is set,
the value “Setpoint
operation” is used
as the setpoint.

Controller Module FM 355


11-16 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
62.0 LMN_OP REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 The configuration -
value operation (%) tool has access to
the in/out
1) parameter
“Manipulated value
operation”. If the bit
LMNOP_ON is set,
the value
“Manipulated value
operation” is used
as the manipulated
value.
66.0 LMNRSVAL REAL Start value of -100.0...100.0 0.0 The configuration -
the repeated (%) tool (controller
manipulated optimization) has
value in access to the input
simulation “Start value of the
position feedback in
simulation”. The
start value for the
simulation is
entered in the
parameter.
(For step
controllers without
analog position
feedback only)
70.0 cont_par WORD Beginning of W#16#3130 W#16#3 The parameter -
control 130 cont_par may not
parameters be changed by the
user. It identifies
the beginning of the
controller
parameters which
are read from the
FM and saved in
the instance DB if
COM_RST = TRUE
and which are
transferred to the
FM if LOAD_PAR =
TRUE is set. The
end of the controller
parameters is the
end of the
instance DB.

72.0 P_SEL BOOL P action on TRUE In the PID algorithm PID


the Controller
PID components
can be switched on
and off separately.
The proportional
component is
switched on if the
input “P action on”
is set.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-17
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
72.1 PFDB_SEL BOOL P action in FALSE In the PID algorithm PID
feedback path the P and D actions Controller
can be placed in the
feedback path. The
P action is in the
feedback path if the
input “P action in
feedback path” is
set.
72.2 MONERSEL BOOL Monitoring: FALSE The controller has a Alarm
Process limit value alarm controller
variable = 0 that can either be
Error signal = 1 used for the
process variable or
the error signal. If
the input
“Monitoring:
Process
variable = 0, Error
signal = 1” is set,
the error signal is
monitored.

74.0 D_EL_SEL INT D-element input 0 to 4 or 17 0 The D element in Error Signal


for the controller the PID algorithm (...)
can be applied at a Controller
separate input. This
is selected via the
input “D element
input for the
controller”.

0: Error
signal
1 to 4: Analog
input
1 to 4
17: Negative
process
variable
76.0 SP_HLM REAL Setpoint high > SP_LLM 100.0 The setpoint is Limit Setpoint
limit (physical always limited to an Controller
variable) upper and a lower
limit. The input
“setpoint high limit”
determines the
upper limit.
80.0 SP_LLM REAL Setpoint low < SP_HLM 0.0 The setpoint is Limit
limit (physical always limited to an Setpoint
variable) upper and a lower Controller
limit. The input
“Setpoint low limit”
determines the
lower limit.

Controller Module FM 355


11-18 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
84.0 H_ALM REAL High limit alarm > H_WRN 100.0 Four limits can be Alarm
(physical set for monitoring Controller
variable) the actual value or
the error signal.
The input “High limit
alarm” determines
the upper limit.
88.0 H_WRN REAL High limit H_ALM...L_W 90.0 Four limits can be Alarm
warning RN set for monitoring Controller
(physical the process
variable) variable or the error
signal. The input
“High limit warning”
determines the
secondary upper
limit.
92.0 L_WRN REAL Low limit H_WRN...L_A 10.0 Four limits can be Alarm
warning LM set for monitoring Controller
(physical the actual value or
variable) the error signal.
The input “Low limit
warning”
determines the
secondary lower
limit.
96.0 L_ALM REAL Low limit alarm < L_WRN 0.0 Four limits can be Alarm
(physical set for monitoring Controller
variable) the actual value or
the error signal.
The input “Low limit
alarm” determines
the lower limit.
100.0 HYS REAL Hysteresis ≥ 0.0 1.0 To avoid flickering Alarm
(physical of the watchdog Controller
variable) LEDs, a hysteresis
can be set at the
input “hysteresis”.
104.0 DEADB_W REAL Dead band ≥ 0.0 0.0 The error signal is Dead Band
width (physical fed via a dead Controller
variable) band. The input
“dead band width”
determines the
width of the dead
band.
108.0 GAIN REAL Proportional Entire range of 1.0 The input PID
gain values “Proportional gain” Controller
(no dimension) determines the
controller gain.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-19
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
112.0 TI REAL Reset time (s) = 0.0 or ≥ 0.5 3000.0 The input “Reset PID
Integration time time” determines Controller
the time response
of the integrating
action element.
If TI = 0, the
integrating action
element is
deactivated
116.0 TD REAL Derivative time = 0.0 or ≥ 1.0 0.0 The input PID
(s) “Derivative action Controller
time” determines
the time response
of the derivative
action element. If
TD = 0 the D
element is switched
off.
120.0 TM_LAG REAL Time lag of the TM_LAG≥ 0.5 5.0 The algorithm of the PID
derivative action D component Controller
(s) contains a time lag
that can be set at
the input “Time lag
of the
D component”.
124.0 LMN_SAFE REAL Safety -100.0...100.0 0.0 A safety value can Switch
manipulated (%) be set for the Safety
value manipulated value Manipulated
at the input “Safety Value
manipulated value”. Controller

128.0 LMN_HLM REAL Manipulated LMN_LLM...10 100.0 The manipulated Limit


value high limit 0,0 value is always Manipulated
(%) limited to an upper Value
and a lower limit. Controller
The input
“Manipulated value
high limit”
determines the
upper limit.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)

Controller Module FM 355


11-20 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-3 In/Out Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_FM

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
132.0 LMN_LLM REAL Manipulated -100,0..LMN_H 0.0 The manipulated Limit
value low limit LM value is always Manipulated
(%) limited to an upper Value
and a lower limit. Controller
The input
“Manipulated value
low limit”
determines the
lower limit.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
136.0 MTR_TM REAL Motor MTR_TM≥ 60.0 The run time of the Pulse
manipulated 0.001 control valve from Shaper
value (s) end stop to end Controller
stop is entered at
the parameter
“Motor actuating
time”.
(For step
controllers only)
140.0 PULSE_TM REAL Minimum pulse ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse
time (s) duration can be set Shaper
with the parameter Controller
“Minimum pulse Split-range/P
time”. ulse Shaper
(For step Controller
controllers or pulse
controllers only)
144.0 BREAK_TM REAL Minimum break ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse
time (s) pause duration can Shaper
be set with the Controller
parameter Split-range/
“Minimum pause Pulse Shaper
time”. Controller
(For step
controllers or pulse
controllers only)

1) You can also change these parameters via the loop display.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-21
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Note
If LOAD_PAR = TRUE is set, all the control parameters are loaded permanently to
the EEPROM of the FM 355.
If LOAD_OP = TRUE is set, only the setpoint SP_RE of the operator parameters
is loaded permanently to the EEPROM of the FM 355. All the other operator
parameters have the values 0 or FALSE preassigned during the FM 355 startup.:
The EEPROM of the module could be destroyed by excessive writing processes.
In order to prevent this the module delays renewed writing to the EEPROM by
30 minutes.

Controller Module FM 355


11-22 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.2 Instance DB of the FB FUZ_355

The FB FUZ_355 is used to read out the controller parameters of the fuzzy
temperature controller from the FM 355. You can then, for example, transfer these
parameters back to the module after you have replaced the FM 355.

Note
You may not change the parameters determined through identification by the
FM 355 since they have been optimized for the process.

The following tables list the input parameters (Table 11-4) and the output
parameters (Table 11-5) of the instance DB.

Table 11-4 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB FUZ_355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains -
module address the module address
that resulted from
the configuration
set under STEP 7.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-23
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-5 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB FUZ_355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
2.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference Manual
/2/).
4.0 PARAFFUZ WORD Parameter fault 0 A parameter -
display assignment error
created by the FB
FUZ_355 is
displayed at the
parameter
PARAFFUZ as
follows:
High byte of
PARAFFUZ = 01:
There is a
parameter
assignment error.
High byte of
PARAFFUZ= 00:
There is no
parameter
assignment error.
The low byte
contains the offset
of the parameter
which caused the
parameter
assignment error,
calculated from the
static variables
FUZ_PAR[1].

Controller Module FM 355


11-24 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-5 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB FUZ_355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
6.0 READ_PAR BOOL Read fuzzy FALSE If the parameter -
parameters READ_PAR is set,
the fuzzy
parameters are
read from the
module and saved
in the static variable
of the instance DB.
6.1 LOAD_PAR BOOL Write fuzzy FALSE If the parameter -
parameters LOAD_PAR is set,
the fuzzy
parameters are
read from the static
variable of the
instance DBs and
transferred to the
module.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-25
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.3 Instance DB of the FB FORCE355

The FB FORCE355 is required to simulate analog or digital input values of the


FM 355.
The following tables list the input parameters (Table 11-6) and the output
parameters (Table 11-7) of the instance DB.

Table 11-6 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB FORCE355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 S_AION ARRAY Switch: FALSE If, for example, the -
[1..4] of Simulation of switch S_AION[1]
BOOL the analog input is set to TRUE, the
by PV_SIM value PV_SIM[1] is
used instead of the
analog input value
1 of the module
(refer to
Figure 7-14 on
Page 7-18).
2.0 S_PVON ARRAY Switch: FALSE If, for example, the -
[1..4] of Simulation of switch S_PVON[1]
BOOL linearized is set to TRUE, the
analog input by value PV_SIM[1] is
PV_SIM used instead of the
conditioned analog
input value 1 of the
module (refer to
Figure 7-14 on
Page 7-18).
4.0 PV_SIM ARRAY Simulated 0.0 to 0.0 The simulation -
[1..4] of analog input 20.0 [mA] or value for the analog
REAL value -1500 to input 1 is, for
+10000 [mV] example, specified
or technical at the input
range of PV_SIM[1]. If
values S_PVON = TRUE,
the conditioned
analog input value
is specified here. If
S_PVON = FALSE
and S_AION =
TRUE, the analog
input value is
specified in mA or
mV here. This is
then still converted
to a conditioned
value by the
conditioning
functions.

Controller Module FM 355


11-26 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-6 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB FORCE355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
20.0 S_DION ARRAY Switch: FALSE If, for example, -
[1..8] of Simulation of S_DION[1] is set to
BOOL digital input by true, the value
DI_SIM DI_SIM[1] is used
as the digital value
instead of the digital
input
in ut 1.
22.0 DI_SIM ARRAY Simulated FALSE (refer to -
[1..8] of digital input Figure 7-14 on
BOOL value Page 7-18).

24.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains -


module address the module address
that resulted from
the configuration
set under STEP 7.

Table 11-7 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB FORCE355

Add-r Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parame


ess Type English Value Range ter
Dialog
Box
26.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an error
is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-27
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.4 Instance DB of the FB READ_355

The FB READ_355 is required to read analog or digital input values from the
FM 355.
The following tables list the input parameters (Table 11-8) and the output
parameters (Table 11-9) of the instance DB.

Table 11-8 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB READ_355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input -
module address contains the
module address
that resulted from
the configuration
set under STEP 7.

Table 11-9 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB READ_355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
2.0 CJ_TEMP REAL Reference 0.0 The reference -
junction junction
temperature temperature
Cold junction measured by the
temperature module is displayed
at the output
CJ_TEMP if a
thermoelement
input was
configured and the
reference junction
temperature was
not specified
configured.

6.0 STAT_DI ARRAY Status of binary FALSE The states of the -


[1..8] of input DI1 to DI8 digital inputs 1 to 8
BOOL are displayed at the
STAT_DI
parameters.
(Channel DIAG[x].PV_ ARRAY Analog input 0.0 The analog input -
number)×8 PER [1..4] of (0 to 20mA, value of the module
STRUCT -1500 to is displayed in the
10000 mV) unit mA or mV at
the parameter
DIAG[1].PV_PER.

Controller Module FM 355


11-28 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-9 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB READ_355

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
(Channel DIAG[x].PV_ ARRAY Linearized 0.0 The conditioned -
number) PHY [1..4] of analog input analog input value
×8+4 STRUCT (physical) of the module is, for
example, displayed
as an engineering
unit at the
parameter
DIAG[1].PV_PHY.
40.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-29
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.5 Instance DB of the FB CH_DIAG

The FB CH_DIAG is needed to read out additional channel-specific diagnostic


variables from the module.
The following tables list the input parameters (Table 11-10) and the output
parameters (Table 11-11) of the instance DB.

Table 11-10 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB CH_DIAG

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains -
module address the module address
that resulted from
the configuration
set under STEP 7.
2.0 CHANNEL INT Channel 1 to 4 1 At the input -
number “Channel number”
you can set the
number of the
controller channel
to which the
instance DB is to
refer.
4.0 SP_R REAL Setpoint ratio 0.0 The input value of -
the setpoint value is
assigned to the
parameter when
the ratio controller
is set.
8.0 PV_R REAL Process 0.0 The following value -
variable ratio is only assigned to
the parameter
value if the ratio
controller is set.
(Process variable A
– Setpoint value
offset) / Process
variable D
12.0 DIF_I REAL Derivative unit 0.0 The input variable -
input of the derivative
component is
displayed at the
parameter DIF_I.
This is, for
example, of interest
if an analog input is
configured as the
input variable of the
derivative
component.

Controller Module FM 355


11-30 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-10 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB CH_DIAG

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
16.0 TRACKPER REAL Input value for 0.0 The parameter -
LMN tracking TRACKPER
displays the input
variable to which
the manipulated
variable is tracked
when the controller
is switched to
manipulated
variable tracking.
20.0 IDSTATUS WORD Status of 0.0 This parameter is -
identification described on
Page 3-53 of
Chapter 3.8

22.0 LMN_P REAL Proportional 0.0 The proportional -


component component of the
manipulated
variable is
displayed at the
parameter LMN_P.
26.0 LMN_I REAL Integral 0.0 The integral -
component component of the
manipulated
variable is
displayed at the
parameter LMN_I.
30.0 LMN_D REAL Derivative 0.0 The derivative -
component component of the
manipulated
variable is
displayed at the
parameter LMN_D.

Table 11-11 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB CH_DIAG

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
34.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-31
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.6 Instance DB of the FB PID_PAR

The FB PID_PAR is used to change parameters online which are not contained in
FB PID_FM.
The following tables list the input parameters (Table 11-12) and the output
parameters (Table 11-13) of the instance DB.

Table 11-12 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_PAR

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 COM_RST BOOL Read TRUE If the parameter -
parameters COM_RST =
from system TRUE, the FB
data PID_PAR carries
out an initialization
run. In the process
the parameters are
read from the
system data of the
CPU and saved in
the instance DB.
2.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains -
module address the module address
that resulted from
the configuration
set under STEP 7.
4.0 CHANNEL INT Channel 1 to 4 1 At the input -
number “Channel number”
you can set the
number of the
controller channel
to which the
instance DB is to
refer.
6.0 INDEX_R INT Index for REAL 0 to 48 0.0 Refer to Section 7.6 -
parameter

8.0 VALUE_R REAL Value for REAL Depending on 0.0 Refer to Section 7.6 -
parameter the respective
parameter

12.0 INDEX_I INT Index for INT 0, 49 to 61 0.0 Refer to Section 7.6 -
parameter

14.0 VALUE_I INT Value for INT Depending on 0.0 Refer to Section 7.6 -
parameter the respective
parameter

Controller Module FM 355


11-32 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-13 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB PID_PAR

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
16.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).
18.0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE If BUSY = TRUE, -
SFC WR_REC the parameters
have not yet been
taken over by the
module (in case of
distributed I/Os).
Calling the
FB PID_PAR
should then be
repeated in the next
cycle.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-33
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.7 Instance DB of the FB CJ_T_PAR

The FB JC_T_PAR is used to change the configured reference junction


temperature on the module online.
The following tables list the input parameters (Table 11-14) and the output
parameters (Table 11-15) of the instance DB.

Table 11-14 Input Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB CJT_T_PAR

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 COM_RST BOOL Read - If the parameter -
parameters COM_RST =
from system TRUE, the FB
data CJ_T_PAR carries
out an initialization
run. In the process
the parameters are
read from the
system data of the
CPU and saved in
the instance DB.
2.0 MOD_ADDR INT FM 355/455 256 This input contains -
module address the module address
that resulted from
the configuration
set under STEP 7.
4.0 CJ_T REAL Reference Depending on 0.0 The reference -
junction the sensor junction
temperature type temperature can be
Cold junction specified via the
temperature parameter CJ_T.

Controller Module FM 355


11-34 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-15 Output Parameters of the Instance DB for the FB CJ_T_PAR

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
8.0 RET_VALU WORD Return value 0 RET_VALU -
SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported
via QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).
10.0 BUSY BOOL BUSY value of FALSE If BUSY = TRUE, -
SFC WR_REC the parameters
have not yet been
taken over by the
module (in case of
distributed I/Os).
Calling the FB
PID_PAR should
then be repeated
in the next cycle.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-35
Assignment of the Data Blocks

11.8 Allocation of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring via
OP

In order to allow operator control and monitoring of the FM 355 via an OP the
variable interface of the FM 355 contains four data blocks with the block
numbers 101 to 104 for the controller channels 1 to 4.
The following tables list the parameters of these data blocks:
• Input parameters (Table 11-16)
• Output parameters (Table 11-17 on Page 11-44)
• In/out parameters (Table 11-18 on Page 11-52)

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
0.0 SP_HLM REAL Setpoint high > SP_LLM 100.0 The setpoint is Limit
limit (physical always limited to an Setpoint
variable) upper and a lower Controller
1) limit. The input
“Setpoint high limit”
determines the
upper limit.
4.0 SP_LLM REAL Setpoint low < SP_HLM 0.0 The setpoint is Limit
limit (physical always limited to an Setpoint
variable) upper and a lower Controller
1) limit. The input
“Setpoint low limit”
determines the
lower limit.
8.0 H_ALM REAL High limit alarm > H_WRN 100.0 Four limits can be Alarm
(physical set for monitoring Controller
variable) the actual value or
1) the error signal.
The input “High limit
alarm” determines
the upper limit.
12.0 H_WRN REAL High limit H_ALM...L_W 90.0 Four limits can be Alarm
warning RN set for monitoring Controller
(physical the actual value or
1) the error signal.
variable)
The input “High limit
warning”
determines the
secondary upper
limit.

Controller Module FM 355


11-36 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
16.0 L_WRN REAL Low limit H_WRN...L_A 10.0 Four limits can be Alarm
warning LM set for monitoring Controller
(physical the actual value or
1) the error signal.
variable)
The input “Low limit
warning”
determines the
secondary lower
limit.
20.0 L_ALM REAL Low limit alarm < L_WRN 0.0 Four limits can be Alarm
(physical set for monitoring Controller
variable) the actual value or
1) the error signal.
The input “low limit
alarm” determines
the lower limit.
24.0 HYS REAL Hysteresis ≥ 0.0 1.0 In order to avoid Alarm
(physical flickering of the Controller
variable) watchdog LEDs, a
1) hysteresis can be
set at the input
“Hysteresis”.
28.0 DEADB_W REAL Dead band ≥ 0.0 0.0 The error signal is Dead Band
width (physical fed via a dead Controller
variable) band. The input
1) “Dead band width”
determines the
width of the dead
band.
32.0 GAIN REAL Proportional Entire range of 1.0 The input PID
gain values “Proportional gain” Controller
(no dimension) determines the
1) controller gain.

36.0 TI REAL Reset time (s) = 0.0 or ≥ 0.5 3000.0 The input “Reset PID
time” determines Controller
the time response
1) of the integrating
action element. If
TI = 0, the
integrating action
element is
deactivated
40.0 TD REAL Derivative time = 0.0 or ≥ 1.0 0.0 The input “Drivative PID
(s) action time” Controller
determines the time
1) response of the
derivative action
element. If TD = 0,
the derivative
element is switched
off.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-37
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
44.0 TM_LAG REAL Time lag of the TM_LAG≥ 0.5 5.0 The algorithm of the PID
derivative action derivative action Controller
(s) contains a time lag
1) that can be set at
the input “Time lag
of the derivative
action”.
48.0 LMN_SAFE REAL Safety -100.0...100.0 0.0 A safety value can Switch
manipulated (%) be set for the Safety
value manipulated value Manipulated
1) at the input “Safety Value
manipulated value”. Controller

52.0 LMN_HLM REAL Manipulated LMN_LLM...10 100.0 The manipulated Limit


value high limit 0,0 value is always Manipulated
(%) limited to an upper Value
1) and a lower limit. Controller
The input
“Manipulated value
high limit”
determines the
upper limit.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
56.0 LMN_LLM REAL Manipulated -100,0..LMN_H 0.0 The manipulated Limit
value low limit LM value is always Manipulated
(%) limited to an upper Value
1) and a lower limit. Controller
The input
“Manipulated value
low limit”
determines the
lower limit.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
60.0 MTR_TM REAL Motor MTR_TM≥ 60.0 The operating time Pulse
manipulated 0.001 of the control valve Shaper
value (s) from end stop to Controller
1) end stop is entered
at the parameter
“Motor actuating
time”.
(For step
controllers only)

Controller Module FM 355


11-38 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
64.0 PULSE_TM REAL Minimum pulse ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse
time (s) duration can be set Shaper
with the parameter Controller
1) “Minimum pulse
time”.
Split-range/
(For step Pulse Shaper
controllers or pulse Controller
controllers only)
68.0 BREAK_TM REAL Minimum break ≥ 0.0 0.2 A minimum pulse Pulse
time (s) pause duration can Shaper
be set with the Controller
1) parameter
“Minimum pause
time”. Split-range/
Pulse
(For step Shaper
controllers or pulse Controller
controllers only)
72.0 SP_RE REAL External Technical 0.0 An external setpoint -
setpoint range of is interconnected to
values the controller at the
2) input “External
setpoint”.
(physical
variable)
76.0 LMN_RE REAL External -100.0...100.0 0.0 An external -
manipulated (%) manipulated value
value is connected to the
2) controller at the
input “External
manipulated value”.
80.0 LMNRSVAL REAL Start value of -100.0...100.0 0.0 The configuration -
the repeated (%) tool has access to
manipulated the input “Start
2) value in value of the
simulation position feedback in
simulation”. The
start value for the
simulation is
entered in the
parameter.
(For step
controllers without
analog position
feedback only)
84.0 SAFE_ON BOOL Safety position FALSE If the input “Safety -
on position on” is set,
a safety value is
2) used as the
manipulated value.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-39
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
84.1 LMNTRKON BOOL Track (LMN FALSE If the input “Track -
from analog (LMN from analog
input) input)” is set, the
2) manipulated value
is matched to an
analog input (AI).
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
84.2 LMN_REON BOOL External FALSE If the input -
manipulated “External
value on manipulated value
2) on” is set, the
external
manipulated value
LMN_RE is used
as the manipulated
value.
84.3 LMNRHSRE BOOL High limit signal FALSE The signal “Control -
of position valve at upper end
feedback stop” is connected
2) at the input “High
limit signal of
position feedback”.
LMNRHSRE =
TRUE means: The
control valve is at
the upper end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
84.4 LMNRLSRE BOOL Low limit signal FALSE The signal “control -
of position valve at lower end
feedback stop” is connected
2) at the input “low
limit signal of
position feedback”.
LMNRLSRE =
TRUE means: the
control valve is at
the lower end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
84.5 LMNSOPON BOOL Manipulated FALSE If the bit at the input -
signal operation “Manipulated value
on signal operation on”
2) is set, the signals
LMNUP_OP and
LMNDN_OP are
used as
manipulated value
signals.
(For step
controllers only)

Controller Module FM 355


11-40 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
84.6 LMNUP_OP BOOL Manipulated FALSE If LMNSOPON is -
signal up set, the value at the
operation input “Manipulated
2) value signal up
operation” is used
as the manipulated
value signal.
(For step
controllers only)
84.7 LMNDN_OP BOOL Manipulated FALSE If LMNSOPON is -
signal down set, the value at the
operation input “Manipulated
2) value signal down
operation” is used
as the manipulated
value signal.
(For step
controllers only)
85.0 MONERSEL BOOL Monitoring: FALSE The controller has a Alarm
Process limit value alarm Controller
variable = 0 that can either be
1) Error signal = 1 used for the actual
value or the error
signal. If the input
“Monitoring:
Process
variable = 0, Error
signal = 1” is set,
the error signal is
monitored.
85.1 LMNRS_ON BOOL Simulation of FALSE If there is no -
the position position feedback, it
feedback on can be simulated.
2) The function is
switched on at the
input “Simulation of
the position
feedback on”.
CAUTION: The
simulation deviates
increasingly from
the real position
feedback as time
passes.
(For step
controllers without
analog position
feedback only)

85.2 FUZID_ON BOOL Fuzzy FALSE Identification of the -


identification on fuzzy algorithm is
switched on at the
2) input “Fuzzy
identification on”.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-41
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-16 Input Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
85.3 SPINT_EN BOOL Operator input: FALSE The input “Operator -
External = 0 input: External = 0,
Internal = 1 Internal = 1”
2) determines the
input that is
transferred to the
module as the
setpoint.
SPINT_EN =
TRUE: SP_INT is
transferred.
SPINT_EN =
FALSE: SP_RE is
transferred.
85.4 P_SEL BOOL P action on TRUE In the PID algorithm PID
the Controller
PID components
1) can be switched on
and off separately.
The proportional
component is
switched on if the
input “P action on”
is set.
85.5 PFDB_SEL BOOL P action in FALSE In the PID algorithm PID
feedback path the P and D actions Controller
can be placed in
1) the feedback path.
The proportional
action is in the
feedback path if the
input “P action in
feedback path” is
set.
86.0 D_EL_SEL INT D element input 0 to 4 or 17 0 The D element in Error Signal
for the controller the PID algorithm (...)
can be applied at a Controller
1) separate input. This
is selected via the
input “D element
input for the
controller”.

0: Error
signal
1 to 4: Analog
input
1 to 4
17: Negative
process
variable

Controller Module FM 355


11-42 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

1) Control parameters: Control parameters are downloaded to the module if the in/out parameter
LOAD_PAR is set.
All control parameters are loaded permanently into the EEPROM of the FM 355.

2) Operator parameters: Operator parameters are downloaded to the module if the in/out parameter
LOAD_OP is set.
Of the operator parameters only the setpoint SP_RE is loaded permanently into
the EEPROM. All the other operator parameters have the values 0 or FALSE
preassigned during the FM 355 startup.

Note
The EEPROM of the module could be destroyed by excessive writing processes.
In order to prevent this the module delays renewed writing to the EEPROM by
30 minutes.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-43
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
94.0 SP REAL Setpoint Technical 0.0 The effective -
range of setpoint is output at
values the output
(physical “Setpoint”.
variable)
98.0 PV REAL Process Technical 0.0 The effective actual -
variable range of value is output at
values the output “Process
(physical variable”.
variable)
102.0 ER REAL Error signal Technical 0.0 The effective error -
range of signal is output at
values the output “Error
(physical signal”.
variable)
106.0 DISV REAL Disturbance -100.0...100.0 0.0 The effective -
variable (%) disturbance
variable is output at
the output
“Disturbance
variable”.
110.0 LMN REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 The effective -
value (%) manipulated value
is output at the
output “Manipulated
value”. At a step
controller without
analog position
feedback the
unlimited
P- + D-component
is output at the
parameter LMN.
114.0 LMN_A REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 At the output -
value A of split (%) “Manipulated value
range function / A of split-range
position function / position
feedback feedback” the
manipulated value
A of the split-range
function for a
continuous
controller and the
position feedback
for a step controller
with analog position
feedback are
displayed.
The simulated
position feedback is
displayed for a step
controller without
analog position
feedback.

Controller Module FM 355


11-44 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
118.0 LMN_B REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 At the output -
value B of split (%) “Manipulated
range function value B of
split-range function”
the manipulated
value B of the
split-range function
is displayed for a
continuous
controller.
122.0 QH_ALM BOOL High limit alarm FALSE The actual value or -
reached process variable is
monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit H_ALM is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “High limit
alarm reached”.
122.1 QH_WRN BOOL High limit FALSE The actual value or -
warning process variable is
reached monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit H_WRN is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “High limit
warning reached”.
122.2 QL_WRN BOOL Process FALSE The actual value or -
variable low process variable is
limit warning monitored for four
reached limit values. If the
limit L_WRN is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “Low limit
warning reached”.
122.3 QL_ALM BOOL Low limit alarm FALSE The actual value or -
reached process variable is
monitored for four
limit values. If the
limit L_ALM is
violated, this is
indicated at the
output “Low limit
alarm reached”.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-45
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
122.4 QLMN_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated value is always
value reached limited to an upper
and a lower limit.
The output “High
limit of manipulated
value reached”
indicates that the
upper limit has
been exceeded.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
122.5 QLMN_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The manipulated -
manipulated value is always
value reached limited to an upper
and a lower limit.
The output “low
limit of manipulated
value reached”
indicates that the
lower limit has been
undershot.
(Not for step
controllers without
analog position
feedback)
122.6 QSPINTON BOOL Internal setpoint FALSE The output “Internal -
on setpoint on”
indicates that
SP_INT was
transferred to the
module.
123.0 QPARA_F BOOL Parameter FALSE The module checks -
assignment parameters for
error validity. A
parameter
assignment error is
indicated at the
output “Parameter
assignment error”.
You can also read
out these
parameter
assignment errors
by using the menu
PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error
of the parameter
assignment
interface.

Controller Module FM 355


11-46 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
123.1 QCH_F BOOL Channel error FALSE The output -
“channel error” is
set if the controller
channel cannot
supply any valid
results. “Channel
error” (for example,
wire break) is also
set if QPARA_F = 1
or QMOD_F = 1. If
QCH_F = TRUE,
the exact error
information can be
read out in the
diagnostics data
record DS1 of the
module.
(refer to
Chapter 12)

123.2 QUPRLM BOOL Limit of positive FALSE The setpoint is -


setpoint limited in positive
inclination and negative
reached inclination. If the
output “Limit of
positive setpoint
inclination reached”
is set, the positive
setpoint inclination
is limited.
123.3 QDNRLM BOOL Limit of negative FALSE The setpoint is -
setpoint limited in positive
inclination and negative
reached inclination. If the
output “Limit of
negative setpoint
inclination reached”
is set, the negative
setpoint inclination
is limited.
123.4 QSP_HLM BOOL High limit of FALSE The setpoint is -
setpoint always limited to an
reached upper and a lower
limit. The output
“High limit of
setpoint reached”
indicates that the
upper limit has
been exceeded.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-47
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
123.5 QSP_LLM BOOL Low limit of FALSE The setpoint is -
setpoint always limited to an
reached upper and a lower
limit. The output
“Low limit of
setpoint reached”
indicates that the
lower limit has been
undershot.
123.6 QSPOPON BOOL Setpoint FALSE The output -
operation on “Setpoint operation
on” indicates
whether the
setpoint is being
operated via the
configuration tool
(loop monitor). If
the bit is set, the
value SP_OP is
used as the
setpoint.
123.7 QLMNSAFE BOOL Safety FALSE If the output “safety -
operation operation” is set,
the safety
manipulated value
is output as the
manipulated value.
124.0 QLMNOPON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The output -
value operation “Manipulated value
on operation on”
indicates whether
the manipulated
value is being
operated via the
configuration tool
(loop monitor). If
the bit is set, the
value LMN_OP is
used as the
manipulated value.

124.1 QLMNTRK BOOL Track FALSE The output “Track” -


indicates whether
the manipulated
value is tracked via
an analog input.
124.2 QLMN_RE BOOL Manual = 1 FALSE The output -
Automatic = 0 “Manual = 1;
Automatic = 0”
indicates whether
the manipulated
value is set to the
external
manipulated
value LMN_RE
(manual = 0) or not.

Controller Module FM 355


11-48 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
124.3 QLMNR_HS BOOL High limit signal FALSE The output “High -
of repeated limit signal of
manipulated position feedback”
value indicates whether
the control valve is
at its upper limit.
QLMNR_HS =
TRUE means: The
control valve is at
the upper end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
124.4 QLMNR_LS BOOL Low limit signal FALSE The output “low -
of repeated limit signal of
manipulated position feedback”
value indicates whether
the control valve is
at its lower limit.
QLMNR_LS =
TRUE means: the
control valve is at
the lower end stop.
(For step
controllers only)
124.5 QLMNR_ON BOOL Repeated FALSE The output -
manipulated “Position feedback
value on on” indicates the
set mode as either
“Step controller with
position feedback”
or “Step controller
without position
feedback”.
124.6 QFUZZY BOOL PID FALSE If the output “PID -
algorithm = 0 algorithm = 0;
Fuzzy = 1 Fuzzy =1” is set,
the controller works
with the fuzzy
algorithm.
124.7 QSPLEPV BOOL Fuzzy display: FALSE The output “Fuzzy -
Setpoint < display: Setpoint <
process actual value” is set
variable when the fuzzy
controller is
switched on if the
setpoint is smaller
than the effective
actual value.
125.0 QSPR BOOL Split range FALSE If the output -
operation “Split-range
operation” is set,
the continuous
controller works in
split-range mode.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-49
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
125.1 QLMNUP BOOL Manipulated FALSE This is the output -
signal up ”Manipulated signal
up”.
(For step
controllers or pulse
controllers only)
125.2 QLMNDN BOOL Manipulated FALSE This is the output -
signal down ”Manipulated signal
down”.
(For step
controllers or pulse
controllers only)
125.4 QBACKUP BOOL Backup FALSE 0= No backup state -
(CPU in RUN)
1= Backup state
(CPU in STOP or
failed)

125.5 QID BOOL Identification FALSE QID = TRUE -


running shows that an
identification is
running (not that it
is switched on).
After the end of
identification the
identification result
can be read out via
the parameter
IDSTATUS of the
FB CH_DIAG (refer
to Page 3-53 of
Section 3.8).

Controller Module FM 355


11-50 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-17 Output Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
125.6 QMAN_FC BOOL Manual mode or FALSE The controller is a -
anti-reset- master controller
windup by which is tracked by
follower manual operation of
controller a secondary
controller to its
process variable or
whose integral
component is
halted because the
setpoint value or
manipulated
variable of the
secondary
controller is in the
limitation.

126.0 RET_VALU INT Return value 0 RET_VALU -


SFC 58/59 contains the return
value RET_VAL of
the SFC58/59.
RET_VALU can be
evaluated if an
error is reported via
QMOD_F (see
Reference
Manual /2/).

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-51
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-18 In/Out Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
128.0 SP_INT REAL Internal setpoint Technical 0.0 The in/out -
range of parameter “Internal
values setpoint” is used to
(physical assign a setpoint
variable) using operator
interface functions.
132.0 SP_OP REAL Setpoint Technical 0.0 The configuration -
operation range of tool (loop monitor)
values has access to the
2) in/out parameter
(physical
variable) “Setpoint
operation”. If the bit
SP_OP_ON is set,
the value “Setpoint
operation” is used
as the setpoint.
136.0 LMN_OP REAL Manipulated -100.0...100.0 0.0 The configuration -
value operation (%) tool (loop monitor)
has access to the
2) in/out parameter
“Manipulated value
operation”. If the bit
LMNOP_ON is set,
the value
“Manipulated value
operation” is used
as the manipulated
value.
140.0 SP_OP_ON BOOL Setpoint FALSE The configuration -
operation on tool (loop monitor)
has access to the
2) in/out parameter
“Setpoint operation
on”. If the bit is set,
the value SP_OP is
used as the
setpoint.
140.1 LMNOP_ON BOOL Manipulated FALSE The configuration -
value operation tool (loop monitor)
on has access to the
2) in/out parameter
“Manipulated value
operation on”. If the
bit is set, the value
LMN_OP is used
as the manipulated
value.

Controller Module FM 355


11-52 A5E00059344-02
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Table 11-18 In/Out Parameters of the DBs for Operator Control and Monitoring

Address Parameter Data Comment Permitted Default Explanation Parameter


Type English Value Dialog
Range Box
140.2 LOAD_PAR BOOL Load control FALSE If the in/out -
parameter to parameter “Load
FM 355/455 control parameters
to FM 355/455” is
set, the control
parameters are
downloaded to the
module and the
in/out parameter
reset.
140.3 LOAD_OP BOOL Load operator FALSE If the in/out -
parameter to parameter “Load
FM 355/455 operator
parameters to
FM 355/455” is set,
the operator
parameters are
downloaded to the
module and the
in/out parameter
reset.

1) Control parameters: Control parameters become effective in the module if the in/out parameter
LOAD_PAR is set.

2) Operator parameters: Operator parameters become effective in the module if the in/out parameter
LOAD_OP is set.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 11-53
Assignment of the Data Blocks

Controller Module FM 355


11-54 A5E00059344-02
Faults and Diagnostics 12
What Does this Chapter Describe?
Operator errors, incorrect wiring or parameter assignment errors can cause faults
that the module has to indicate to the user.
You will find the following described in this chapter:
• Which faults can occur
• Where these faults are indicated
• How you acknowledge the faults
• The diagnostics interrupt on the FM 355

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


12.1 Fault Indication via the Group Error LED 12-2
12.2 Triggering of Diagnostics Interrupts 12-3
12.3 Faults in Measuring Transducers 12-7

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 12-1
Faults and Diagnostics

12.1 Fault Indication via the Group Error LED

If the red group error LED lights up, a fault has occurred either on the module
(internal fault) or at the cable connections (external fault).
If the yellow LED flashes, the firmware has been deleted. This state can only occur
if the hardware is defective or if the loading process for the firmware was aborted.

Which Faults are Indicated?


The following faults are indicated by the group error LED lighting up:

Type of Diagnostics Possible Cause of Fault Remedy


Fault Message
Internal Module defective Hardware fault Exchange module
f lt
fault
Time-out responded Hardware fault Exchange module
(watch dog)
EEPROM content Supply voltage failed during Assign new module
invalid parameter assignment parameters
External Wrong parameter in Incorrect parameters were Assign new module
fault module entered at the module parameters
Error at analog inputs Analog input Replace module
or analog outputs hardware fault
Analog input Repair wire break
wire break
Analog input Check measurement
measurement range signal
underflow
Analog input Check measurement
measurement range overflow signal
Analog output Repair wire break
wire break
Analog output Repair short circuit
short circuit
External auxiliary 24-V supply failed Restore the 24-V
supply not present supply

Diagnostics Interrupt at Faults


All faults can trigger a diagnostics interrupt provided you have enabled the
diagnostics interrupt in the relevant parameter assignment dialog box. You can see
which faults have caused the LED to light up from the diagnostics data records
DS0 and DS1. The assignments of the diagnostics data records DS0 and DS1 are
described in the next section.

Controller Module FM 355


12-2 A5E00059344-02
Faults and Diagnostics

12.2 Triggering of Diagnostics Interrupts

What is a Diagnostics Interrupt?


If a user program is to respond to an internal or external fault, you can set a
diagnostics interrupt parameter that interrupts the cyclic progam of the CPU and
calls the diagnostics interrupt OB, OB 82.

Which Events Can Trigger a Diagnostics Interrupt?


The following list shows you which events can trigger a diagnostics interrupt:
• Module parameter assignment missing or faulty
• Module defective
• Wire break in analog inputs (4 to 20 mA only)
• Overflow and underflow in analog inputs
• Break in load or short circuit in analog outputs

Default Setting
The default setting for the diagnostics interrupt is disabled.

Enabling the Diagnostics Interrupt


You disable or enable the diagnostics interrupt for the module in the “Basic
parameters” dialog box.

Reactions to an Event Triggering an Interrupt


The following occurs when an event occurs which can trigger a diagnostics
interrupt:
• The diagnostics information is stored in the diagnostics data records DS0 and
DS1 on the module.
• The group error LED lights up.
• The diagnostics interrupt OB is called (OB 82).
• The diagnostics data record DS0 is entered in the start information of the
diagnostics interrupt OB.
• If no hardware defect is found, the module continues with its control task.
If an OB 82 has not been programmed, the CPU goes into STOP.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 12-3
Faults and Diagnostics

Diagnostics Data Record DS0 and DS1


The information as to which event has triggered a diagnostics interrupt is stored in
the diagnostics data records DS0 and DS1. The diagnostics data record DS0
comprises four bytes. DS1 comprises 16 bytes with the first four bytes being
identical to DS0.

Reading the Data Record from the Module


The diagnostics data record DS0 is automatically transferred to the start
information when the diagnostics OB is called. These four bytes are stored there in
the local data area (bytes 8 through 11) of OB 82.
You can read out the diagnostics data record DS1 (and so also the contents of
DS0) from the module with the system function SFC59 “RD_REC”. It only makes
sense to do this if a fault in a channel is reported in DS0.
SFC 59 must be called in the same OB as the FB PID_FM. This is achieved as
follows: Set a bit while OB 82 is being processed. Scan this bit in the OB in which
the FB PID_FM is also called and call SFC 59 while the bit is set.

How Is the Diagnostics Text Displayed in the Diagnostics Buffer?


If you want to enter the diagnostics message in the diagnostics buffer, you must
call the system function SFC52 “Enter user-specific message in diagnostics buffer”
in the user program. The event number of the diagnostics message in each case is
specified in the input parameter EVENTN. The interrupt is entered in the
diagnostics buffer with x=1 as incoming and with x=0 as outgoing. The diagnostics
buffer contains the relevant diagnostics text in the “Meaning” column as well as the
time of the entry.

Assignment of the Diagnostics Data Record DS0 and the Start Information
Table 12-1 shows the assignment of the diagnostics data record DS0 in the start
information. All unlisted bits are insignificant and take the value zero.

Controller Module FM 355


12-4 A5E00059344-02
Faults and Diagnostics

Table 12-1 Assignment of the Diagnostics Data Record DS0

Byte Bit Meaning Remarks Event No.


0 0 Module in fault Set for every diagnostics event 8:x:00
1 Internal fault Set for all internal faults: 8:x:01
• Time-out responded
• EEPROM contents invalid. Module
starts up without controlling and waits
for renewed parameter assignment
by the CPU
• EPROM fault
• ADC/DAC fault
• Analog input hardware fault
2 External fault Set for all external faults: 8:x:02
• External auxiliary supply not present
• Parameter assignment incorrect
• Analog input wire break
(4 to 20 mA only)
• Analog input measurement range
underflow
• Analog input measurement range
overflow
• Analog output wire break
• Analog output short circuit
3 Fault in a channel See DS 1, from byte 7 for further 8:x:03
breakdown
4 External auxiliary 24-V supply of the FM 355 failed 8:x:04
supply not present
6 EEPROM content Failure of the supply voltage during a 8:x:03
invalid write process to the EEPROM. The
module starts up with default parameters.
7 Parameter The module cannot evaluate a 8:x:07
assignment parameter.
incorrect Reason:
Parameter unknown or illegal
combination of parameters.
Refer to menu PLC > Parameter
Assignment Error Display
1 0 ... 3 Module class 2 always assigned –
4 Channel-specific Is set if the module can provide additional –
diagnostics channel information and a channel fault
is present (see DS1, byte 7 to 12)
2 3 Time-out Hardware fault 8:x:33
responded
(watch dog)
3 2 EPROM fault Module defective 8:x:42
4 ADC/DAC fault Module defective 8:x:44

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 12-5
Faults and Diagnostics

Diagnostics Data Record DS1


The diagnostics data record DS1 consists of 16 bytes. The first 4 bytes are
identical to the diagnostics data record DS0. Table 12-2 shows the assignments of
the remaining bytes. All unlisted bits are insignificant and take the value zero.

Diagnostics Data Record DS 1 of the FM 355


Table 12-2 shows the assignment of the diagnostics data record DS1 of the
FM 355.

Table 12-2 Assignment of the Bytes 4 to 12 of the Diagnostics Data Record DS1 of the
FM 355

Byte Bit Meaning Remarks Event No.


4 0 ... 7 Channel type 75H always assigned –
5 0 ... 7 Length of the diagnostics 8 always assigned –
information
6 0 ... 7 Number of channels 5 always assigned –
(4 controllers + 1 reference
channel)
7 0 ... 7 Channel fault vector A bit is assigned to each –
channel
8 0 Analog input 8:x:B0
hardware fault
1 Unused 8:x:B1
2 Analog input wire break (4 to 8:x:B2
20 mA only)
3 Unused 8:x:B3
Channel-
Channel
4 Analog input specific 8:x:B4
measurement range diagnostics
underflow channel 1
5 Analog input 8:x:B5
measurement range overflow
6 Analog output wire break C controller 8:x:B6
only
7 Analog output short circuit C controller 8:x:B7
only
9 0 ... 7 See byte 8 Channel-specific diagnostics See above
channel 2
10 0 ... 7 See byte 8 Channel-specific diagnostics See above
channel 3
11 0 ... 7 See byte 8 Channel-specific diagnostics See above
channel 4
12 0 ... 5 See byte 8 Diagnostics for reference See above
channel

Controller Module FM 355


12-6 A5E00059344-02
Faults and Diagnostics

12.3 Faults in Measuring Transducers

Faults in Measuring Transducers


The following faults in measuring transducers can be recognized by the FM 355:
• Measurement range underflow
• Measurement range overflow
• Wire break (not for all measuring ranges)
Whenever one of these faults occurs, the group error ”External error” is set in the
diagnostics data record DS0 and channel-specific error bits are set in the
diagnostics data record DS1 (refer to Tables 12-1 and 12-2). The corresponding
bits are reset when these faults have been eliminated.
The subsequent table shows at which limits in the individual measuring ranges the
error bits are set or reset:

Measuring Error Bit Measuring Error Bit Measuring Error Bit Wire Break
Range Range Underflow at ... Range Overflow at ... Display
DS1: Byte 10 to 26, Bit 4 DS1: Byte 10 to 26, Bit 5 DS1: Byte 10 to 26, Bit 2
0 to 20 mA < – 3.5 mA > 23.5 mA –
4 to 20 mA Error bit = 1 at < 3.6 mA > 22.8 mA Error bit = 1 at < 3.6 mA
Error bit = 0 at > 3.8 mA Error bit = 0 at > 3.8 mA
0 to 10 V < – 1.175 V > 11.75 V –
Pt 100 < 30.82 mV > 650.46 mV –
(–200 to 850 °C)
(–328 to 1562 °F)
Pt 100 < 30.82 mV > 499.06 mV –
(–200 to 556 °C)
(–328 to 1032 °F)
Pt 100 < 30.82 mV > 254.12 mV –
(–200 to 130 °C)
(–328 to 264 °F)
Thermocouple < 0 mV > 13.81 mV –
Type B
Thermocouple < – 8.1 mV > 69.54 mV –
Type J
Thermocouple < – 6.45 mV > 54.88 mV –
Type K
Thermocouple < – 0.23 mV > 21.11 mV –
Type R
Thermocouple < – 0.24 mV > 18.7 mV –
Type S
Free < Lower input value of the < Upper input value of the –
thermocouple polygon polygon

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 12-7
Faults and Diagnostics

Controller Module FM 355


12-8 A5E00059344-02
Examples 13
Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


13.1 Application Example for the FM 355 S 13-2
13.2 Application Example for the FM 355 C 13-6
13.3 Application Example for the Diagnostics 13-10
13.4 Interconnection Example for a Cascade Control 13-11
13.5 Interconnection Example for a Ratio Control 13-12
13.6 Interconnection Example for a Blending Control 13-13

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-1
Examples

13.1 Application Example for the FM 355 S

Overview
The example “SIMATIC 300 Station1 (S)” is included in the project FM_PIDEx
which allows you to operate the FM 355 S on a process simulated in the CPU. This
means you can test the module without a real process.

Requirements
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for you to be able to work with the
example program:
• CPU 314 is inserted in slot 2
• FM 355 S is inserted in slot 4
• CPU and FM 355 S are supplied with power
• Online connection between the programming device/PC and CPU available
If you want to use a different CPU or FM 355, you have to adapt the example
under the hardware configuration.

Downloading the Example Program


Proceed as follows to download the example program:
1. Download the “Blocks” user program from Example 355 S to the CPU.
2. Start the parameter assignment application for the FM 355 in the “HW Config:
Hardware Configuration” software.
3. Use the menu item Debug > ... > Open Instance DB to open the DB 31.
You can now work with the loop display, the curve recorder and the controller
optimization.

Using the Example Program


The example (Example 355 S) contains a step controller in connection with a
simulated process which consists of a third-order time delay (PT3).
The example program is a simple method for creating a step controller and for
configuring and debugging it in all its properties in an offline interaction with a
typical process.
The example program provides an opportunity to easily learn how controllers with a
discontinuous output - as they are often used in controlling processes with
motor-driven actuating elements - operate and how to configure them. This means
the example is suitable for introduction and training purposes.
By selecting appropriate parameters, you can adjust the process to approximate
the characteristics of a real process. By using the configuration tool you can find a
set of suitable controller data by identifying the model process.

Controller Module FM 355


13-2 A5E00059344-02
Examples

Functions of the Example Program


The example ”Example 355 S” consists mainly of the two function blocks PID_FM
(FB 31) and PROC_S (FB 100). PID_FM acts as the step controller while
PROC_S simulates a process with the function elements ”Valve” and PT3
(Figure 13-1). Apart from the process variable, the controller also receives
information about the position of the actuator and limit position signals if limit stops
are reached.

DISV

Setpoint
Step
- Controller
Actual
Value (Actuator) Pt 3

Limit Stop Signals

Position Feedback

Controlller Process

Figure 13-1 Example of a Control Loop (Example 355 S)

The function block PROC_S simulates a cascade connection which consists of the
integrating actuating element and three first order time-delay elements
(Figure 13-2).The disturbance variable DISV is always added to the output signal
of the actuator so that process disturbances can be fed in manually at this point.
The static process gain can be determined by using the factor GAIN.
The parameter for the motor actuating time MTR_TM defines the time required by
the actuator to move from one limit stop to the other.

QLMNR_HS
QLMNR_LS

DISV GAIN
INV_UP
OUTV
INV_DOWN + X

MTR_TM LMNR_HLM TM_LAG1 TM_LAG2 TM_LAG3


LMNR_LLM

Figure 13-2 Structure and Parameters of the Process Block PROC_S

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-3
Examples

Block Structure
Example 1 is made up of the APP_1 function with the blocks for the controller and
simulated process as well as the call blocks for a complete restart (OB 100) and a
watchdog interrupt class (OB 35 with a 100 ms time base).

Table 13-1 Blocks for Example 1

Block Name Description


(in the symbol table)
OB 100 Complete restart OB
OB 35 Time-driven OB: 100 ms
FC100 APP_1 Example 1
FC101 SIM_355 Process value transfer in FM 355 S
FB 31 PID_FM Step controller FM 355 S
FB 100 PROC_S Process for step controller
DB 100 PROCESS Instance DB for PROC_S
DB 31 DB_PID_FM Instance DB for PID_FM

Parameters of the Model Process for Step Controllers


Figure 13-3 shows the function chart and the parameters of the process.

Input Parameters Output Parameters


PROC_S (FB 100)
Parameter Type *) Signal Type *)
COM_RST BOOL FALSE
CYCLE TIME T#1s
GAIN REAL 0.0
DISV REAL 0.0
INV_UP BOOL FALSE QLMNR_HS BOOL FALSE
INV_DOWN BOOL FALSE + OUTV REAL 0.0
QLMNR_LS BOOL FALSE
LMNR REAL 0.0
LMNR_HLM REAL 100.0
LMNR_LLM REAL 0.0
MTR_TM TIME T#30s
TM_LAG1 TIME T#10s
TM_LAG2 TIME T#10s
TM_LAG3 TIME T#10s
*) Default when new instance DB is created

Figure 13-3 Function Scheme and Parameters of the PROC_S Process Model

Controller Module FM 355


13-4 A5E00059344-02
Examples

Parameters and Step Response


The reaction of a control loop with a simulated third-order PT process is shown on
the basis of a concrete parameter assignment of the step controller with PI effect
and activated dead band. The process parameters selected with a 10 sec. time lag
approximate the response of a fast temperature process or a level controlling
system.
Setting one of the time lags TM_LAGx = 0 sec. reduces the process by one order.
The curve (configuration tool) shows the transient and settling response of the
closed loop after a setpoint change of 60% (Figure 13-4). The table contains the
values set for the relevant parameters of the controller and process.

Parameter Type Parameter Value Description


Controller:
GAIN REAL 0.31 Proportional gain
TI TIME 19.190 s Reset time
MTR_TM TIME 20 s Motor actuating time
PULSE_TM TIME 100 ms Minimum pulse time
BREAK_TM TIME 100 ms Minimum pause time
DEADB_ON BOOL TRUE Dead band on
DEADB_W REAL 0.5 Dead band width
Process:
CYCLE TIME 100 ms Sampling time
GAIN REAL 1.5 Process gain
MTR_TM TIME 20 s Motor actuating time
TM_LAG1 TIME 10 s Time lag 1
TM_LAG2 TIME 10 s Time lag 2
TM_LAG3 TIME 10 s Time lag 3

100
Setpoint Actual value
50

0
Position
feedback
signal
-50

-100
15:53 15:54 15:55 15:56 15:57 15:58 15:59 16:00 16:01

Figure 13-4 Control Loop with Step Controller after a Step Change in the Setpoint

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-5
Examples

13.2 Application Example for the FM 355 C

Overview
The example “SIMATIC 300 Station2 (C)” is included in the project FM_PIDEx
which allows you to operate the FM 355 C on a process simulated in the CPU.
This means you can test the module without a real process.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for you to be able to work with the
example program:
• CPU 314 inserted in slot 2
• FM 355 C inserted in slot 4
• CPU and FM 355 C with voltage supplied
• Online connection between the programming device/PC and CPU is available
If you want to use a different CPU or FM 355, you have to adapt the example
under the hardware configuration.

Downloading the Example Program


Proceed as follows to download the example program:
1. Download the “Blocks” user program from Example 355 C to the CPU.
2. Start the parameter assignment application for the FM 355 in the “HW Config:
Hardware Configuration” software.
3. Use the menu item Debug > ...> Open Instance DB to open the DB 31.
Now you can work with the loop monitor, curve recorder, and the controller
optimization.

Using the Example Program


The example (Example 355 C) contains a continuous controller in connection with
a simulated process which consists of a third-order time-delay element (PT3).
Using the sample program it is possible to create a continuous PID controller easily
and to assign parameters and test all its characteristics in offline interaction with a
typical process arrangement.
The example will help inexperienced users to understand how controllers work and
how to configure controllers with an analog output signal, just as they are very
often used to control systems involving processes with proportional actuators. This
means the example is suitable for introduction and training purposes.

Controller Module FM 355


13-6 A5E00059344-02
Examples

By selecting appropriate parameters, you can adjust the process to approximate


the characteristics of a real process. By using the configuration tool you can find a
set of suitable controller data by identifying the model process.

Functions of the Example Program


The example ”Example 355 C” consists mainly of the two function blocks PID_FM
(FB 31) and PROC_S (FB 100). PID_FM represents the controller and PROC_C
simulates a third-order self-regulating process (Figure 13-5).

DISV

SP Continuous LMN
controller
PV -
PT 3

Controlller Process

Figure 13-5 Example of a Control Loop (Example 355 C)

The function block PROC_C simulates a series connection comprising three


first-order time lag elements (Figure 13-6). The disturbance variable DISV is
always added to the output signal of the actuator so that process disturbances can
be connected manually at this point. Using the GAIN factor, you can select the
static process gain.

DISV GAIN

INV OUTV
+ X

TM_LAG1 TM_LAG2 TM_LAG3

Figure 13-6 Structure and Parameters of the Process Block PROC_C

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-7
Examples

Block Structure
Example 2 is made up of the APP_2 function with the blocks for the controller and
simulated process as well as the call blocks for a complete restart (OB 100) and a
watchdog interrupt class (OB 35 with a 100 ms time base).

Table 13-2 Blocks for Example 2

Block Name Description


(in the symbol table)
OB 100 Complete restart OB
OB 35 Time-driven OB: 100 ms
FC100 APP_2 Example 2
FC101 SIM_355 Process value transfer in FM 355 C
FB31 PID_FM Continuous controller FM 355 C
FB100 PROC_C Process for continuous controller
DB100 PROCESS Instance DB for PROC_C
DB31 DB_PID_FM Instance DB for PID_FM

Parameters of the Model Process for Continuous Controllers


Figure 13-7 shows the function chart and the parameters of the process.

Input Parameters Output Parameters


PROC_C (FB 100)
Parameter Type *) Signal Type *)
COM_RST BOOL FALSE
CYCLE TIME T#1s
GAIN REAL 0.0
DISV REAL 0.0

INV REAL 0.0 + OUTV REAL 0.0

TM_LAG1 TIME T#10s


TM_LAG2 TIME T#10s
TM_LAG3 TIME T#10s

*) Default when new instance DB is created

Figure 13-7 Functions and Parameters of the PROC_C Process Model

Controller Module FM 355


13-8 A5E00059344-02
Examples

Parameters and Step Response


The reaction of a control loop with a simulated third-order PT process is shown on
the basis of a concrete parameter assignment of a continuous controller with
PID effect. The process parameters selected with a 10 sec. time lag approximate
the response of a pressure control or a level control.
Setting one of the time lags TM_LAGx = 0 sec. reduces the process by one order.
The curve (configuration tool) illustrates the transient and settling response of the
closed loop after a series of setpoint changes of 20% of the measuring range
(Figure 13-8). The table contains the values set for the relevant parameters of the
controller and process.

Parameter Type Parameter Description


Value
Controller:
GAIN REAL 1.535 Proportional gain
TI TIME 22.720 s Reset time
TD TIME 5.974 s Derivative action time
TM_LAG TIME 1.195 s Time lag of the D action
Process:
CYCLE TIME 100 ms Sampling time
GAIN REAL 1.5 Process gain
TM_LAG1 TIME 10 s Time lag 1
TM_LAG2 TIME 10 s Time lag 2
TM_LAG3 TIME 10 s Time lag 3

100
Manipulated
variable
50

Setpoint
-50
Process
variable
-100
17:15 17:16 17:17 17:18 17:19 17:20 1/:21 17:22 17:23

Figure 13-8 Controlling with a Continuous Controller and Setpoint Step Changes over the
Entire Measuring Range

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-9
Examples

13.3 Diagnostics

Overview
The project FM_PIDEx contains the example “SIMATIC 300 Station3 (C)” which
shows the application and the evaluation of the diagnostics in the DS1 of the
controller module.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for you to be able to work with the
example:
• CPU 314 inserted in slot 2
• FM355C inserted in slot 4
• CPU and FM355C are supplied with voltage
• Online connection between the programming device/PC and CPU available
If you want to use a different CPU or FM 355, you have to adapt the example
under the hardware configuration.

Note
Diagnostics interrupts are only triggered in the CPU if you have selected the
following settings at the ”Basic parameters” tab in the ”Properties - FM 355 C PID
Control” in HW Config:
• Generate interrupt Yes
• Select interrupt Diagnostics

Downloading the Example Program


Download the “Blocks” user program with the system data to the CPU.

Using the Example Program


If a diagnostics interrupt occurs, the parameter DIAG_ON of the
FB1 FM_DIAG_355 is set in the OB 82. The FM_DIAG_355 is called in the
OB 35. It reads the diagnostics data record DS1 of the module (refer to
Section 12.2, Triggering Diagnostics Interrupts).

Controller Module FM 355


13-10 A5E00059344-02
Examples

13.4 Interconnection Example for a Cascade Control

The following figure shows a two-loop cascade control:

SP Controller 1 LMN Controller 2 QLMNUP Process


Process
- (Pulse - (Step QLMNDN
section 1 section 2
controller) controller)
PV PV

Figure 13-9 Two-Loop Cascade Control

This controller interconnection is implemented with a FM 355 S by configuring a


pulse controller as a master controller and by selecting the manipulated variable of
the master controller at the setpoint value input of the secondary controller.
You can also implement a controller cascade by means of a FM 355 C. The master
controller is then not a pulse controller and the secondary controller is not a step
controller. The interconnection can be implemented identically.
In the secondary controller the manipulated value of the master controller is
normalized from the range of 0 to 100% to the range of the process variable A and
is then processed further as a setpoint variable.

Manipulated Setpoint preprocessing


value LMN
of the master
controller
Setpoint Effective
Switch Ramp Limit setpoint
safety
setpoint Error
signal

Alarm

Actual value A Effective


actual
value

D input

Disturbance variable

Figure 13-10 Implementation of the Cascade Control with FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-11
Examples

13.5 Interconnection Example for a Ratio Control

Figure 13-11 shows a ratio control with two control loops:

SP1 LMN1
Controller 1 Process 1
PV1

FAC
X
SP2
LMN2 Process 2
Controller 2
PV2

Figure 13-11 Ratio Control with Two Control Loops

Controller 1 is configured as a fixed setpoint controller. Controller 2 is configured


as a ratio/blending controller. Its interconnection is shown in Figure 13-12.
The ratio factor FAC is specified via the setpoint input of the FB PID_FM (SP_RE
or SP_OP).

Setpoint preprocessing Multiply


FAC
Setpoint Effective
Switch Ramp Limit setpoint
safety
Process setpoint Error
variable signal
PV 1
Actual value D
Process
variable Alarm
PV 2
Actual value A Effective
actual
value

D input

Disturbance variable

Figure 13-12 Implementation of the Ratio Control with FM 355

Controller Module FM 355


13-12 A5E00059344-02
Examples

13.6 Interconnection Example for a Blending Control

Figure 13-13 shows a blending control with three components:

Total quantity Main component

SP Controlller LMN SP1 Controller 1 QLMNUP PV1


- (Pulse X - (Step QLMNDN Process 1
PV controller) controller)
FAC1

SP2 Controller 2 QLMNUP PV2


X - (Step QLMNDN Process 2 X +
controller)
FAC2

SP3 Controller 3 QLMNUP PV3


X - (Step QLMNDN Process 3 X +
controller)
FAC3

Figure 13-13 Blending Control for Three Components

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-13
Examples

The master controller is configured as a three-component controller and pulse


controller. Controllers 1, 2 and 3 are configured as ratio/blending controllers.
Figure 13-14 shows the interconnection for the master controller. You can use the
”Totalize” command button zo configure the blending factors for the components
PV2 and PV3. If you have to change these factors during running operation, you
can use the FB PID_PAR to do so (refer to Chapter 7.6).

Setpoint preprocessing

Setpoint
Effective
Switch Ramp Limit setpoint
safety
setpoint

Error
Process signal
Total
variable
PV 1
Process

variable
PV 2 Effective
actual
Process
value
variable
PV 3
D input

Disturbance variable

Figure 13-14 Implementation of the Total Quantity Controller (Master Controller)

Controller Module FM 355


13-14 A5E00059344-02
Examples

The secondary controllers are configured as ratio/blending controllers. Component


PV1 shows an example of their interconnection in Figure 13-15. The blending
factor FAC is specified via the setpoint input of the FB PID_FM (SP_RE or
SP_OP).
In the secondary controller (blending controller) the manipulated variable of the
master controller is normalized from the range of 0 to 100% to the range of the
process variable A and is then processed further as the process variable D.

Setpoint preprocessing Multiply


FAC
Setpoint Effective
Switch Ramp Limit/ setpoint
Manipulated safety normalize
variable LMN of setpoint Error
the master signal
controller
Actual value D
Process
variable Alarm
PV 1
Actual value A Effective
actual
value

D input

Disturbance variable

Figure 13-15 Implementation of the Component Controller (Secondary Controller)

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 13-15
Examples

Controller Module FM 355


13-16 A5E00059344-02
Data Sheet A
Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


A.1 Technical Specifications A-4
A.2 Technical Specifications - Function Blocks A-9
A.3 Technical Specifications - Parameter Assignment Software A-10

General Technical Specifications


General technical specifications are
• Electromagnetic compatibility
• Transportation and storage conditions
• Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
• Information on dielectric tests, class of protection and degree of protection
These general technical specifications are described in manual /1/ .
They contain the standards and test values fulfilled by S7-300 and the test criteria
in accordance with which S7-300 was tested.

UL/CSA Approvals
The following approvals have been obtained for the S7-300 system:
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to
Standard UL 508
CSA Certification Mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to
Standard C 22.2 No. 142

FM Approvals
The following approval has been obtained for the S7-300 system:
FM approval to Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I,
Division 2, Group A, B, C, D.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 A-1
Data Sheet

Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if plug-in
connections are interrupted during operation of an S7-300.
The S7-300 must always be deenergized prior to separating plug-in connections in
hazardous areas.

Warning
! DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS
KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS

CE Certification
Our products meet the requirements of EU Directive 89/336/EEC
“Electromagnetic Compatibility”.
In accordance with the above-mentioned EU Directive, Article 10, the EU
declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at
the address below:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation Group
A&D AS E 48
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Fed. Rep. of Germany

Area of Use
SIMATIC products have been designed for use in industry.
They can also be used in the domestic environment (household, business and
trade, small plants) with individual approval.

Area of Use Requirements


Emitted Immunity
Interference
Industry EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995

Controller Module FM 355


A-2 A5E00059344-02
Data Sheet

Observing the Installation Guidelines


SIMATIC products meet the requirements if you observe the installation guidelines
described in the manuals when installing and operating the equipment.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 A-3
Data Sheet

A.1 Technical Specifications - Hardware


Dimensions and Weight Galvanic isolation
Dimensions • From backplane bus Yes (optocoupler)
W × H × D (mm) 80 × 125 × 120 • Between channels No
Weight approx. 470 g Permissible difference in
potential
Module-Specific Data
• Between input (ground 75 VDC
No. of digital inputs 8 connection) and central 60 VAC
No. of digital outputs 8 (S controllers only) grounding point
No. of analog inputs 4 • Between analog inputs 2.5 VDC
No. of analog outputs 4 (C controllers only) and MANA (VCM)
– If signal = 0 V
Cable length
• Isolation tested with 500 VDC
• Digital signals max. 600 m
unshielded Current consumption
• Digital signals shielded max. 1000 m • From backplane bus typ. 50 mA
• Analog signals shielded 200 m max. 75 mA
50 m with 80 mV • From L+ (without load)
and thermocouples – C controller typ. 260 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials max. 310 mA
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC – S controller typ. 220 mA
• Permitted range 20.4 to 28.8 V max. 270 mA
• Reverse polarity Yes Power losses from the
protection for input module
supply – C controller typ. 6.5 W
• Reverse polarity Yes max. 7.8 W
protection for output
supply – S controller typ. 5.5 W
max. 6.9 W
No. of digital inputs that can
be controlled at one time Status, Interrupts,
• Horizontal position Diagnostics
to 60 °C 8 Status indication Yes, green LED per
• Vertical position digital input channel
to 40 °C 8
Interrupts
Residual current of the • Limit value interrupt Yes, param. can be
digital outputs
• Diagnostic interrupt set
• Horizontal position Yes, param. can be
to 40 °C max. 0.4 A set
to 60 °C max. 0.4 A
Diagnostics functions Yes, param. can be
• Vertical position
set
to 40 °C max. 0.4 A
• Fault indication on the Yes, red LED
module for group errors
• Diagnostics information
read out Yes
Back-up operation Yes, indicated by
orange LED

Controller Module FM 355


A-4 A5E00059344-02
Data Sheet

Interference Suppression, Fault Limits (Inputs) Interference Suppression, Fault Limits


(Outputs)
Interference voltage
suppression for Crosstalk between the 40 dB
f = n × (f1 ± 1 %), outputs
(f1 = interference > 70 dB Operational limit (in whole
frequency)
temperature range, with
• Common mode > 40 dB reference to output area)
interference
• Voltage ± 0.5 %
(Uss < 2.5 V)
• Current ± 0.6 %
• Series mode
interference (peak value Basic error limit (operational
of the limit at 25 °C, with reference
interference < rated to output area)
value of the input range) • Voltage ± 0.2 %
Crosstalk between the • Current ± 0.3 %
inputs
Temperature sensitivity ± 0.02 %/K
• At 50 Hz 50 dB (with reference to output
• At 60 Hz 50 dB area)
Operational limit (in whole Linearity error (with ± 0.05 %
temperature range, with reference to output area)
reference to input area) Repeat accuracy (in ± 0.05 %
• 80 mV ±1% steady-state condition at
• From 250 to 1000 mV ± 0.6 % 25 °C, with reference to
• From 2.5 to 10 V ± 0.8 % output area)

• From 3.2 to 20 mA ± 0.7 % Output ripple; range ± 0.05 %


0 to 50 kHz (with reference
Basic error limit (operational to output area)
limit at 25 °C, with reference
to input area)
• 80 mV ± 0.6 %
• From 250 to 1000 mV ± 0.4 % Data for Selecting a Sensor
• From 2.5 to 10 V ± 0.6 % (Digital Inputs)
• From 3.2 to 20 mA ± 0.5 % Input voltage
Temperature sensitivity ± 0.005 %/K • Rated value 24 VDC
(with reference to input • For signal “1” From 13 to 30 V
area) • For signal “0” From -3 to 5 V
Linearity error (with ± 0.05 % Input current
reference to input area)
• When signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Repeat accuracy (in ± 0.05 %
Input delay time
steady-state condition at
25°C, with reference to • Can be set No
input area) • From “0” to “1” From 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• From “1” to “0” From 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic curve To IEC1131, type 2
Connection of 2-wire Possible
BEROs
• Permitted closed-circuit ≤ 1.5 mA
current

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 A-5
Data Sheet

Data for Selecting a Sensor Data for Selecting a Sensor


(Analog Inputs) (Analog Inputs)
Input ranges (nominal values)/input resistance Permissible input voltage 30 V
for voltage input (for max. 2 inputs)
• Voltage ** ± 80 mV /10 MΩ
(destruction limit)
(–80 to +80 mV)***
Permissible input current for 40 mA
0 to 10 V /100 kΩ current input (destruction
(–1.175 to 11.75 V) limit)
• Current** 0 to 20 mA /50 Ω * Connection of signal
(–3.5 to 23.5 mA) sensors
4 to 20 mA /50 Ω * • For measuring voltage Possible
(0 to 23.5 mA) • For measuring current Possible
as a 4-wire measuring
• Thermo- B (0...13.81 mV) /10 MΩ transducer
couple J (–8.1...69.54 mV) /10 MΩ
types ** Characteristic curve Yes, param. can be
K (–6.45..54.88 mV) /10 MΩ linearization set
R (–0.23..21.11 mV) /10 MΩ • For thermocouples Types B, J, K, R, S
S (–0.24..18.7 mV) /10 MΩ
• For resistance Pt 100
For Type B: 42.15 °C to thermometers (standard range)
1820.01°C
Temperature compensation Yes, param. can be
For Type J: –210.02°C
set
to 1200.02 °C
• Internal temperature Possible
For Type K: –265.40 °C
compensation
to 1372.11°C
• External temperature Possible
For Type R: – 51.37 °C
compensation with
to 1767.77°C
Pt 100
For Type S: – 50.40 °C
to 1767.98 °C
• Resistance Pt 100 /10 MΩ
thermo- Current 1.667 mA
meters ** impulse-commutated:

(30.82 ...650.46 mV)


–200.01 ... 850.05 °C
(simple resolution)

(30.82...499.06 mV)
–200.01 ... 556.26 °C
(double resolution)

(30.82...254.12 mV)
–200.01 ... 129.20 °C
(four-fold resolution)

* External measuring shunt


** The same limits apply for underflow and overflow indication as for the display range. Exception: underflow
indication for 4 to 20 mA: 1 for <3.6 mA
0 for > 3.8 mA
For the range of 4 to 20 mA the underflow report is displayed for a wire break.

*** or the lower or upper input value of the polygon. The value with the smaller amount applies.

Controller Module FM 355


A-6 A5E00059344-02
Data Sheet

Data for Selecting an Actuator Data for Selecting an Actuator


(Digital Outputs) (Analog Outputs)
Output voltage Output ranges ± 10 V
• When signal “1” min. L+ (– 2.5 V) (nominal values) from 0 to 10 V
± 20 mA
Output current from 0 to 20 mA
• For signal “1” from 4 to 20 mA
Nominal value 0.1 A
Load resistance
Permissible range from 5 mA to 0.15 A
• For signal “0” • With voltage outputs min. 1 k 
– Capacitive load max. 1 F
Residual current max. 0.5 mA
• With current outputs max. 500 
Load resistance range 240  to 4 k
– Inductive load max. 1 mH
Power output
Voltage output
• Lamp load max. 5 W
• Short-circuit protection Yes
Parallel switching of
• Short-circuit current max. 25 mA
2 outputs
• For logic operation Possible Current output
• To increase power Not possible • Open-circuit voltage max. 18 V
Connection of actuators
Controlling a digital input Possible
• For voltage output Possible
Switching frequency 2-wire connection
• For resistive load/lamp max. 100 Hz • For current output
load 2-wire connection Possible
• For inductive load max. 0.5 Hz
Limit (internal) of the typ. L+ (– 1.5 V)
inductive cut-off voltage on
Short-circuit protection of Yes, electronic
the output

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 A-7
Data Sheet

Analog Value Formation


Measuring principle Integrating

Resolution (incl. overrange) Can have parameters set:


• 12 bits
• 14 bits
Conversion time
(per analog input)
• With 12 bit resolution 162/3 ms (at 60 Hz)
• With 12 bit resolution 20 ms (at 50 Hz)
• With 14 bit resolution 100 ms (at 50 and 60 Hz)
Settling time
• For resistive load 0.1 ms
• For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• For inductive load 0.5 ms
Can substitute values be Yes, param. can be set
applied
Integration/conversion
time/resolution (per
channel)
• Can be set 162/3 20 100
• Integration time in ms 17 22 102
• Basic conversion time
incl. processing time in
ms
• Additional 1 1 1
conversion time for
resistance
measurement in ms
or
additional 162/3 20 100 *
conversion time for
reference junction
input in ms
• Resolution in bits 12 12 14
(incl. overrange)
Measuring range
• Interference voltage 60 50 50, 60
suppression for
interference
frequency f1 in Hz

* Valid when a resolution of 14 bits is set at at least


one input.

Controller Module FM 355


A-8 A5E00059344-02
Data Sheet

A.2 Technical Specifications - Function Blocks

Table A-1 Technical Specifications of the Function Blocks

Function Assignment in Processing Time in


Bl k
Blocks
Working Load Local Data CPU 314 CPU 414
Memory Memory Area
PID_FM 1592 bytes 1976 bytes 40 bytes Refer to Table A-2
FORCE355 630 bytes 790 bytes 52 bytes 2.2 ms 2.0 ms
READ_355 526 bytes 644 bytes 66 bytes 2.5 ms 2.2 ms
CH_DIAG 302 bytes 420 bytes 64 bytes 2.3 ms 2.1 ms
FUZ_355 356 bytes 464 bytes 22 bytes 2.1 ms 1.9 ms
PID_PAR 918 bytes 1074 bytes 24 bytes 4.3 to 8 ms 3.8 to 7.2 ms
Depending on whether
INDEX_R and INDEX_I are both
≠0
CJ_T_PAR 274 bytes 354 bytes 22 bytes 1.8 ms 1.6 ms

Table A-2 Processing Time of the PID_FM under Various Marginal Conditions

Marginal Conditions Processing Time in


READ_VAR LOAD_OP LOAD_PAR CPU314 CPU 414-2DP
FALSE FALSE FALSE 0.65 ms 0,077 ms
TRUE FALSE FALSE 2.85 ms 2.36 ms
*) TRUE FALSE 4.56 ms 4.48 ms
FALSE FALSE TRUE 3.75 ms 2.59 ms
TRUE FALSE TRUE 5.95 ms 5.15 ms
*) TRUE TRUE 7.66 ms 7.1 ms

*) If LOAD_OP = TRUE, READ_VAR is also set to TRUE by FB PID_FM.

Table A-3 Technical Specifications of the Instance DBs

Instance DBs of the Assignment in


F
Function
ti Bl
Blocks
k ...
Working Memory Load Memory
PID_FM 190 bytes 490 bytes
FORCE355 64 bytes 214 bytes
READ_355 78 bytes 184 bytes
CH_DIAG 72 bytes 178 bytes
FUZ_355 80 bytes 172 bytes
PID PAR
PID_PAR 290 bytes 410 bytes
CJ_T_PAR 58 bytes 130 bytes

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 A-9
Data Sheet

A.3 Technical Specifications - Parameter Assignment Software

Technical Specifications Parameter Assignment Software


Memory requirement (hard disk) 4 Mbytes

Technical Specifications System Data


Memory requirement in the CPU 1258 bytes

Controller Module FM 355


A-10 A5E00059344-02
Spare Parts B
Spare Parts
Table B-1 lists all Spare Parts of the S7-300 that you can order for the FM 355
either additionally or later.

Table B-1 Accessories and spare parts

Parts for the S7-300 Order No.


Bus connector 6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0
Labeling sheet 6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0
Slot number plate 6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0
Screw-type front connector (20-pin) 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
Shield attachment 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
(with 2 screw-type bolts)
Shield connection terminals for
• 2 cables with 2 to 6 mm shield 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
diameter each
• 1 cable with 3 to 8 mm shield 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
diameter
6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0
• 1 cable with 4 to 13 mm shield
diameter

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 B-1
Spare Parts
Spare

Controller Module FM 355


B-2 A5E00059344-02
Literature List C
Supplementary Literature
The following table lists the manuals referred to in this manual.

No. Title Order No.


/1/ SIMATIC S7; S7-300 Programmable Controller; 6ES7 398-8AA03-8BA0
Hardware and Installation
/2/ SIMATIC; System Software for S7-300 and Part of the package
S7-400; System and Standard Functions 6ES7 810-4CA04-8BR0

You will also find the basics on closed-loop control explained (in German) in the
following books:

Title Author Order No.


“From a Process to Gißler/Schmid A19100-L531-F196
Controlling” ISBN 3-8009-1551-0
“Controlling on the Basis of Siemens E80850-C331-X-A2
SIMATIC S5”

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 C-1
LiteratureList
Literature List

Controller Module FM 355


C-2 A5E00059344-02
Glossary

Actual Value The actual value of the process variable PV.

Blending Control Blending control involves a controller structure in which the setpoint for
the total amount SP is converted to percentages of the individual
components. The total of the blending factors FAC must be 1 (= 100%).

SP SP1 LMN1 PV1


FAC1 Controller 1 Process 1

SP4 LMN4 PV4


FAC4 Controller 4 Process 4

Cascade Control Cascade control involves a series of interconnected controllers, in


which the master controller adjusts the setpoint for the secondary
(slave) controllers according to the instantaneous error signal of the
main process variable.
A cascade control system can be improved by including additional
process variables. A secondary process variable PV2 is measured at a
suitable point and controlled to the reference setpoint (output of the
master controller SP2). The master controller controls the process
variable PV1 to the fixed setpoint SP1 and sets SP2 so that the target
is achieved as quickly as possible without overshoot.

Disturbance
Master controller variable
Slave controller
SP1 SP2
Controller 1 LMN PV2
Controller 2 Process 2 Process 1

Secondary
loop
Main loop PV1

Control Process

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Glossary-1
Glossary

Closed-Loop A closed-loop controller is a device in which the error signal is


Controller continuously calculated (comparator) and an actuating signal (output
variable) generated with the aim of eliminating the error signal quickly
and without overshoot.

Configuration A software tool for creating and assigning parameters to a standard


controller and optimizing the controller settings using the data from a
process identification procedure.

Control Device The control device comprises the controller, actuator and sensor
(measuring device) for the process variables.

Controller Controller parameters are characteristic values for the static and
Parameter dynamic adaptation of the controller response to the given loop or
process characteristics.

Control Loop The control loop is the connection between the process output (process
variable) and the controller input and the controller output (manipulated
variable) with the process input, so that the controller and process form
a closed loop.

Control Output The control output correction prevents a manipulated-variable step


Correction jump during the changeover from manual to automatic mode.The
manipulated variable remains the same when switching between
manual and automatic.

Dead Time Dead time is the time lag in the process variable reaction to
disturbances or manipulated variable changes in processes involving
transport. The input variable of a dead time element is displaced by the
value of the dead time 1 : 1 at the output.

Derivative The derivative action component is the differentiating component of the


Component controller.
D elements alone are unsuitable for control since they do not produce
an output signal if the input signal remains at a constant value.

Controller Module FM 355


Glossary-2 A5E00059344-02
Glossary

Digital Control A controller that acquires a new value for the controlled variable
(process variable) at constant intervals (→sampling time) and then
calculates a new value for the manipulated variable as a function for
the value of the current error signal.

wk yk = A(wk - xk)
yk Pulse y (t) Actuator
Memory
A = control shaper

Process
xk
algorithm

x (t)
ADC Sampling Sensor

Disturbance All influences on the process variable (with the exception of the
Variable manipulated variable) are known as disturbances. Influences adding to
the process output signal can be compensated by superimposing the
actuating signal.

Error Signal The error signal function forms the error signal ER = SP-PV. At the
point at which the comparison is made the difference between the
desired value (setpoint) and the actual process value is calculated. This
value is applied to the input of the control algorithm. Old designation:
System deviation

Feedforward Feedforward control is a technique for reducing or eliminating the


Control influence of a dominant (measurable) disturbance (for example,
ambient temperature) in the control loop.The measured disturbance
variable DISV is compensated before it affects the process. Ideally, the
influence can be fully compensated so that the controller itself does not
need to take corrective action itself (with the I action).

DISV (disturbance
DISV variable)
feedforward

SP – LMN PV
Controller Process

Control loop

Fixed Setpoint A fixed setpoint controller is a controller with a fixed setpoint that is only
Control changed occasionally. This controller is used to compensate for
disturbances occurring in the process.

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Glossary-3
Glossary

Follow-Up Control Follow-up control involves a controller in which the setpoint is


constantly influenced externally (secondary controller of a multiple-loop
control system). The task of the secondary controller is to correct the
local process variable as quickly and accurately as possible so that it
matches the setpoint.

Integral (I) Integral action component of the controller.


Component After a step change in the process variable (or error signal) the output
variable changes with a ramp function over time at a rate of change
proportional to the integral-action factor KI (= 1/TI). The integral
component in a closed control loop has the effect of correcting the
controller output variable until the error signal becomes zero.

1
INV OUTV(t) = INV0 * t
OUTV TI
INV0

t
TI

Limit Alarm An algorithm (function) for monitoring four selectable limits of an analog
Monitor value. When these limits are reached or exceeded, a corresponding
warning (first limit) or alarm (second limit) signal is generated. To avoid
signal flickering, the off threshold of the limit signals can be selected
with a hysteresis parameter.

Limiter An algorithm (function) for restricting the range of values of constant


variable to selectable upper or lower limit values.

Manipulated The manipulated variable is the output variable of the controller or input
Variable variable of the process. The actuating signal can take the form of an
analog percentage or a pulse duration value. With integrating actuators
(for example, motor-driven) binary up/down or forwards/backwards
signals are adequate.

Normalization Normalization is a technique (algorithm) for converting (normalizing) the


physical values of a process to the internal percentages used by the
controller and converting the percentages to physical values at the
output. The normalization curve is determined by the start value and
the end value.

Controller Module FM 355


Glossary-4 A5E00059344-02
Glossary

P Algorithm Algorithm for calculating an output signal in which there is a


proportional relationship between the error signal and manipulated
variable change. Characteristics: steady-state error signal, not to be
used with processes including dead time.

Parallel Structure The parallel structure is a special type of signal processing in the
controller (mathematical processing). The P, I and D components are
calculated parallel to each other with no interaction and then totalled.

LMN_P Linear
GAIN combination
GAIN = 0
SP INT LMN_I
X +
– TI = 0 PID_OUTV
PV
DIF LMN_D
TD = 0

Physical → Normalization
Normalization

PI Algorithm Algorithm for calculating an output signal in which the change in the
manipulated variable is made up of a component proportional to the
error signal and an integral component proportional to the error signal
and time. Characteristics: no steady-state error signal, faster
compensation than with an I algorithm, suitable for all processes.

PID Algorithm Algorithm for calculating an output signal formed by multiplication,


integration and differentiation of the error signal. The PID algortithm is
carried out in a pure → parallel structure. Characteristics: high degree
of control quality can be achieved providing the dead time of the
process is not greater than the sum of the other time constants.

Process The process is the part of the system in which the process variable is
influenced by the manipulated variable (by changing the level of energy
or mass). The process can be divided into the actuator and the actual
process being controlled.

LMN PV

t t
LMN Process (e.g. PT 3) PV

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Glossary-5
Glossary

Process Control The process control unit is the part of the process which is used to
Unit influence the manipulated variable at the process input. Generally
comprises an actuator and a final controlling element.

Process Process identification is a function of the configuration tool which


Identification provides information about the transfer function and the structure of the
process. The result is a device-independent process model that
describes the static and dynamic response of the process. The
optimum settings and design of the controller are calculated based on
this model.

Adaptation

Controller Process
design model
GAIN, TI, TD Identification

SP LMN
Controllers Process

PV
Control loop

Process Variable Process variable (output variable of the process) that is compared with
the instantaneous value of the setpoint (the actual value). Its
instantaneous value is called the actual value.

Controller Module FM 355


Glossary-6 A5E00059344-02
Glossary

Ratio Control
• Single loop ratio controller. A single loop ratio controller is used (for
example, in speed control) when the ratio of two process variables is
more important than the absolute values of the variables.

SP LMN
Controllers Process
– +
Ratio
PV1
PV2
Quotient

• Multiple loop ratio controller.


In a multiple loop ratio controller, the ratio of the two process variables
PV1 and PV2 must be kept constant. To this purpose the setpoint value
of the second control loop is calculated from the process variable of the
first control loop. Even if the process variable PV1 changes
dynamically, the ratio is maintained.

SP LMN1 PV1
Controller 1 Process 1

Factor
LMN2 PV2
Controller 2 Process 2

Root extraction → Square root

Setpoint The setpoint is the instantaneous reference input that specifies the
desired value or course of the process variable being controlled. The
momentary value is called the → Setpoint value (SP).

Setpoint Value The setpoint value is the value that the process variable should adopt
under the influence of the controller.

Square Root The square root function SQRT linearizes quadratic relationships.

Step and Pulse The step and pulse controller is a quasi-continuous controller with two
Controller binary output signals. The step-action controller serves to control
integrating actuators (for example, stepper motor to open and close a
valve). The pulse controller serves to control non-integrating actuators
(for example, switching heating on and off, or controlling a burner).

Three-Step A controller that can only adopt three discrete states; for example “heat
Controller - off - cool” or “right - stop - left”

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Glossary-7
Glossary

Controller Module FM 355


Glossary-8 A5E00059344-02
Index
A Areas of use, of the FM 355, 1-4
Actual value, Glossary-1
Actuators
connecting to analog output, 10-13 B
connecting to digital output, 10-15 Backup operation, 3-48
Address Basic parameters, 3-5
fixed address, 4-3 Blending control, 3-14, Glossary-1
free address, 4-3 example, 13-13
starting address, 4-2 Bus connector, 1-6
Addressing, 4-3 Bus expansion connector, 4-4
Analog input, connecting to measuring sensor,
10-3
Analog inputs C
adaptation to sensors, 3-6
C controller, 1-1
block diagram, 9-6
Cable, for analog signal, 10-2, 10-13
number, 1-3
Cables, 5-9
properties, 9-4
cross-section, 5-9
wiring diagram, 9-5
Cascade control, 3-13, 3-18, Glossary-1
Analog output, connecting loads/actuators,
example, 13-11
10-13
CE, Certification, iv, A-2
Analog outputs
Certification, CE, iv, A-2
block diagram, 9-9
CH_DIAG, 7-21
number, 1-3
Changeover, manual-automatic, 3-24
properties, 9-7
Changing controller parameters, 7-2
signal selection, 3-35
via the PID_FM, 7-5
signal type, 3-35
Changing controllers, via the OP, 7-6
wiring diagram, 9-8
Channel number, entering in DB, 7-2, 7-21,
Analog outputs of the FM 355 C, 3-35
7-25, 7-30
Analog signal
Channels, number of, 1-3
cable for, 10-2, 10-13
CJ_T_PAR, 7-30
cables, 5-9
Closed-loop controller, Glossary-2
invalidation, 10-2
Compensation
shielding, 5-9
configured, 10-7
Analog value conditioning, 3-8
external, 10-7
Anti reset wind-up, 3-24
reference junction temperature, 10-6
Application example
Configuration, 4-2, Glossary-2
diagnostics, 13-10
flow of data, 3-38
FM 355 C, 13-6
Connecting to analog output, loads/actuators,
FM 355 S, 13-2
10-13
Approval
Connecting to digital output, loads/actuators,
CSA, A-1
10-15
FM, A-1
Approvals, iv
UL, A-1

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Index-1
Index

Connector pin assignment Diagnostics interrupt


FM 355 C, 5-3 default setting, 12-3
FM 355 S, 5-5 enable, 12-3
Continuous-action controller, 1-1 OB 82, 12-3
Control algorithm, block diagram, 3-20 trigger events, 12-3
Control loop, Glossary-2 triggering, 12-2, 12-3
Control output correction, 3-28, Glossary-2 what is a diagnostics interrupt?, 12-3
Control parameter, 11-22, 11-53 Diagnostics text, 12-4
Control parameters, 11-43 Digital control, Glossary-3
Control processes, 1-2 Digital inputs, 3-9
Control structures of the FM 355, 1-2 cables, 5-9
Control tasks, 1-4 Input filters, 5-7
Controller, 3-2 number, 1-3
continuous, 1-1 properties, 9-2
self-tuning, 1-2 shielding, 5-9
step and pulse, 1-1 wiring and block diagram, 9-3
structure, 3-10 Digital output, connecting loads/actuators,
Controller output, 3-28 10-15
functions, 3-33 Digital outputs, 5-7
Controller output of C controller, 3-28, 7-9, number, 1-3
7-12 properties, 9-2
Controller output of S controller, 3-32, 7-10, wiring and block diagram, 9-3
7-11, 7-13, 7-14 Digital outputs of the FM 355 S, 3-36
Controller output of step controller, 3-30, 3-32 Direction of control action, 3-23
Controller parameter, Glossary-2 Disturbance variable, 3-17
Controller state IDSTATUS, 3-53 Disturbance variable (DISV), Glossary-3
Controller type, 3-11
Controllers, cascadability, 3-46
Core end sleeve, 5-9 E
Creating an Instance DB, 8-3
Error signal (ER), Glossary-3
CSA, A-1
Error signal formation, 3-11
fixed setpoint/cascade controller, 3-12, 7-8,
7-11
D ratio controller, 3-14
Data management in the FM 355, 3-37 Example
Dead band, 3-27 blending control, 13-13
Dead time, 3-46, 3-49, Glossary-2 cascade control, 13-11
Delay of the derivative action (TM_LAG), 3-25 ratio control, 13-12
Derivative (D) component, Glossary-2 Example APP_1
Diagnostic interrupt, 1-3 block structure, 13-4
Diagnostic LEDs, 1-6 functionality, 13-3
Diagnostics data record, 12-4 parameters of the model process, 13-4
Diagnostics data record DS0, assignment, step response of the control loop, 13-5
12-5
Diagnostics data record DS1, assignment,
12-6

Controller Module FM 355


Index-2 A5E00059344-02
Index

Example APP_2 FM approval, A-1


block structure, 13-8 Follow-up control, Glossary-4
functionality, 13-7 FORCE355, 7-17
parameters of the model process, 13-8 Four-wire measuring transducer, connecting,
step response of the control loop, 13-9 10-11
Example program, using, 13-2, 13-6 Four-wire measuring transducer, 10-2
External fault, 12-2 Front connector
connection possibilities, 1-6
ordering, 1-6
F terminal assignment, 5-2, 5-4
wiring, 5-9, 5-10
Fault
Front connector coding, 1-6
external, 12-2
Front connector of the FM 355 C, 5-2, 5-3
internal, 12-2
Front connector of the FM 355 S, 5-4, 5-5
Fault indication, 12-2
Function block, create instance DB, 7-15, 7-17,
Faults in measuring transducers, 3-33
7-19, 7-21, 7-25, 7-30
FB CH_DIAG, 7-21
Function blocks, technical specifications, A-9
FB CJ_T_PAR, 7-30
FUZ_355, 7-15
FB FORCE355, 7-17
Fuzzy controller, 1-2
FB FUZ_355, 7-15
FB PID_FM, 7-2
FB PID_PAR, 7-25
FB READ_355, 7-19 G
Feedforward control, 3-22, Glossary-3 Group error LED, 12-2
Filter, 3-8
Firmware update, 3-48
Fixed Setpoint Control, Glossary-3 H
FM 355
Hardware, FM 355, 1-5
areas of use, 1-4
Hardware configuration, 6-2
basic structure, 3-2
Hardware interrupts, 1-3
configuring, 3-37
HW installation and wiring, 8-1
control action mechanisms, 3-37
Hysteresis for warning and alarm limit, 3-19
data management, 3-37
in the S7-300 configuration, 1-9
inserting into project, 8-2
mounting on DIN rail, 4-4 I
order numbers, 1-1 Identification
properties, 3-43 aborting , 3-52
rules for operating, 3-46 completing, 3-52
technical specifications, A-4 prerequisites, 3-51
variants, 1-1 starting, 3-51
where to use, 1-4 state, 3-53
FM 355 C Identification of process, 3-50
application example, 13-6 IDSTATUS, 3-53
block diagram, 3-3 Input delay, 5-7
interconenction possibilities, 3-3 Input filter, 5-7
FM 355 hardware, 1-5 Inputs of the FM 355, 3-2, 3-6
FM 355 S Installation, 6-1
application example, 13-2 parameter assignment interface, 6-1
block diagram, 3-4 Installation position, 4-2
interconenction possibilities, 3-4 Installing and removing the FM 355, 4-4
FM 355 software, 1-8 Installing the FM 355, 4-4

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Index-3
Index

Instance DB Multiplying, 3-18


creating and supplying, 7-2, 7-15, 7-17,
7-19, 7-21, 7-25, 7-30
of the FB CH_DIAG, 11-30 N
of the FB CJ_T_PAR, 11-34
Normalization, 3-8, Glossary-4
of the FB FORCE355, 11-26
Normalize/limit, 3-18
of the FB FUZ_355, 11-23
of the FB PID_FM, 11-2
of the FB PID_PAR, 11-32
of the FB READ_355, 11-28 O
Integral (I) component, Glossary-4 OB 82, diagnostics interrupt, 12-3
Integral-action control, 3-25 Online help, 1-8, 1-9
Internal fault, 12-2 Operating by means of the FB PID_FM, 7-3
Interrupt, 3-19 Operating mode of the FM 355, 1-2
Operating point for P(D) controller, 3-28
Operator control and monitoring
L allocation of the DBs, 11-36
via FB PID_FM, 3-40
Labeling strips, 1-6
via the OP, 3-40
LEDs, meaning, 1-6
Operator control and monitoring of the FM 355,
Limit alarm monitor, Glossary-4
3-42
Limit/normalize, 3-18
Operator parameters, 11-22, 11-43, 11-53
Limiter, Glossary-4
Optimizing the process, 8-4
Loads
Order number, 1-6
connecting to an analog output, 10-14
Order numbers, 1-1
connecting to analog output, 10-13
Outputs of the FM 355, 3-2, 3-35
connecting to digital output, 10-15

P
M
P algorithm, Glossary-5
Manipulated value
P controller, 2-7
at restart, 3-46
Parallel structure (PID), Glossary-5
limiting, 3-33
Parameter
switch external, 3-33
control parameter, 11-22, 11-53
Manipulated value limiting, 3-33
operator, 11-22
Manipulated variable (LMN), Glossary-4
Parameter assignment, 6-2, 8-3
Maximum number, FM 355, 4-2
what to observe, 6-3
Measured value resolution, 9-4
Parameter assignment interface, 1-8, 3-37
Measurement range overflow, 12-7
Parameter assignment masks, integrated help,
Measurement range underflow, 12-7
6-3
Measuring sensor
Parameter assignment software, technical
connecting, 10-2
specifications, A-10
isolated, 10-3
Parameter configuration, 3-37
non-isolated, 10-4
Parameter configuration interface, 3-37
to analog input, 10-3
Parameter data
Measuring transducer fault, 12-7
saving, 8-3
Module address, entering in DB, 7-2, 7-15,
transferring, 8-3
7-17, 7-19, 7-21, 7-25, 7-30
Monitoring by means of the FB PID_FM, 7-3

Controller Module FM 355


Index-4 A5E00059344-02
Index

Parameter optimization, temperature controller, R


3-50
Ramp, 3-18
Parameters
Ratio control, 3-15, Glossary-7
control parameters, 11-43
example, 13-12
downloading directly, 3-37
READ_355, 7-19
in/out parameters, 11-36
README file, 6-2
input parameters, 11-36
Reference input, 9-4
operator parameters, 11-43, 11-53
Reference junction, 1-3, 3-7, 3-43, 10-7
output parameters, 11-36
for a thermoelement, 10-6
saving in the EEPROM, 7-7
Reference junction input, 3-46
PD controller, 2-9
Reference junction temperature, 9-4, 10-6
delay of the derivative action, 3-25
compensation, 10-6
step response, 3-25
measuring, 10-6
PD effect in the feedback, 3-22
Reference point, 10-2, 10-13
PI algorithm, Glossary-5
Reference temperature compensation, 3-7
PI controller, 2-11
Release, 1-6
step response, 3-24
Removing the FM 355, 4-5
PID algorithm, Glossary-5
Reset time, 9-4
PID closed-loop control, 3-26
Resistance thermometer, connecting, 10-12
PID controller, 2-13
Resolution, 3-8
configuration, 3-26
measured value, 9-4
control algorithm, 3-21
Reversing the controller action, 3-23
controller structure, 3-22
Rules for operating, 3-46
step response, 3-26
PID_FM, 7-2
PID_PAR, 7-25
Polyline, 3-8 S
Position feedback input, 3-33 S controller, 1-1
Power frequency, adaptation, 3-7 Safety manipulated value, 3-33
Power supply, of the sensors, 5-7 Safety regulations, 4-3
Power supply L+, M, 5-7 Sampling time, 3-7, 3-44, 3-46
Process, Glossary-5 Self-tuning controller, 1-2
characteristic values, 2-2 Setpoint, Glossary-7
Process control unit, Glossary-6 Setpoint value, 3-16
Process identification, Glossary-6 at restart, 3-46
Process optimization, 8-4 conditioning, 3-18
Process parameters, 2-18, 2-21 Setpoint value (SV), Glossary-7
Process simulation (APP_1), 13-3 Shielding support element, 5-10
Process simulation (APP_2), 13-7 Signal error formation, three-component
Process variable, conditioning, 3-18 controller, 3-13
Process variable (PV), Glossary-6 Simulation
Process variables, 3-16 of the analog values, 7-17
Processing sequence, 3-43, 3-45, 3-46 of the digital values, 7-18
Program examples, 6-1 Slots, permitted, 4-2
Project, creating, 8-2 Smooth changeover, 3-24
Proportional control, 3-23 Software, FM 355, 1-8
Proportional-plus-derivative control, 3-25 Split range, 3-29, 3-30
Proportional-plus-integral control, 3-24 Split-range function, 3-28
Pulse shaper, 3-34 Split-range function three-step controller, 3-31

Controller Module FM 355


A5E00059344-02 Index-5
Index

Split-range function two-step controller, 3-31 Three-step controller, Glossary-7


Split-range manipulated values, 3-34 Three-step controller, 3-31
Square root, 3-8, Glossary-7 Three-step controllers, 2-6
Start-up characteristics, general, 3-46 Tracking, 3-33
Starting address, 4-2 Tracking input, 3-33
Starting up Two-wire measuring transducer, connecting,
creating a new project, 8-2 10-11
hardware installation and wiring, 8-1 Two-position controller, 3-30
inserting FM in project, 8-2 Two-step controller
saving a project, 8-4 with feedback, 2-5
Startup characteristics, at separate power without feedback, 2-4
supply, 3-47 Two-wire measuring transducer, 10-2
Status LEDs, 1-6
Step and pulse controller, 1-1, Glossary-7
Switch safety setpoint, 3-18 U
UL, A-1
User program, interconnection, 7-2
T
Technical specifications
function blocks, A-9 V
hardware, A-4
Variants of the FM 355, 1-1
parameter assignment software, A-10
View of module, 1-5
Temperature, Celsius/Fahrenheit, 3-7
Voltage sensor, 10-2
Temperature controller, 3-21
connecting, 10-10
parameter optimization, 3-50
requirements to the process, 3-49
Terminal assignments, 1-6
Thermoelement, 10-5 W
connecting, 10-7 Wire break, 12-7
design, 10-5
operating principle, 10-6
possibilities of connecting, 10-7
reference junction, 10-6
types, 10-5
with configured compensation, 10-9
with external compensation, 10-8

Controller Module FM 355


Index-6 A5E00059344-02
Siemens AG
A&D AS E 81

Oestliche Rheinbrueckenstr. 50
D-76181 Karlsruhe
Federal Republic of Germany

From:
Your Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Your Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
City, Zip Code_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Country: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Phone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Please check any industry that applies to you:

 Automotive  Pharmaceutical
 Chemical  Plastic
 Electrical Machinery  Pulp and Paper
 Food  Textiles
 Instrument and Control  Transportation
 Nonelectrical Machinery  Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
 Petrochemical

Controller Module FM 355


1


A5E00059344-02
Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness
of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire
and return it to Siemens.

Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range
from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents meet your requirements?
2. Is the information you need easy to find?
3. Is the text easy to understand?
4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:

Additional comments:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Controller Module FM 355


2 A5E00059344-02

Вам также может понравиться